Tải bản đầy đủ (.docx) (240 trang)

Unit 1. Back to school

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.07 MB, 240 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

<b>week: 1</b>



<b>Preparing's day:14/8/2011</b>



<b>Period: 1 Introduction/Revision{1p}</b>


<b>A. Aims:</b>Helps Ss to consolidate the first final semester test .


<b>B. Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to complete their test &</b>
consolidate the grammar in the test .


<b> I. Knowlege :</b>
Vocabulary :<i> .</i>


Grammar:


<b> II. Skills:</b> Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>C.Ways of working: T-wc,gw,pw.</b>


<b>D.Materials: chalk,board….</b>


<b>E .Anticipated problems: Ss may forget their English after a long holiday,T can</b>
review for them.


<b>F . Teaching proceduces :</b>


<b>I. Greeting & checking absence ( 1 m ):</b>
- Greeting in English.


<b>II. Revision : </b>
<b>III.</b> New lesson :



<b>TEACHER’S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


<b>PRESENTATION</b>
<b>1. Multiple choice:</b>


- Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss
to complete.


- Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains
the reason how to choose the keys.


- Corrects & comments.
Exercise


1. He...a student.
2. who...they?


3. What...he do in his free time?
4. She stays...at 6 o’clock.
5. What...this? It’s a pen.


Time: 15 ms.


- Completing the exercise.


- Giving the answer keys & explaining
the reason how to choose the keys.


* Answer keys:
1. is



2. are
3. does
4. up
5. is
<b>PRACTICE</b>


<b>2. Matching: Exercise 1-P44.</b>


- Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to match the questions in column
A with the answer in column B


- Asks Ss to compare the keys.
- Corrects & comments.


Time 10 ms .


<b>-Working in pairs to match the</b>
questions


in column A with the answer in
column B


- Comparing the keys & give the keys.
- Correcting the keys.


* Answer key:


1:b; 2: e; 3: d; 4: a; 5: c.



A B


1. How are you ? a. I’m in grade 6..


2. Where do you live ? b. I’m fine. Thank you..
3. How do you go to school ? c. It’s a book.


4. Which grade are you in ? d. By bicycle.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

<b>PRODUCTION</b>
<b>1. Write the answer in the words:</b>


-Introduces the requirement & the exercise &
Asks Ss to work in pairs to write the write the
answer in the words:


- Asks Ss to compare the keys.
- Asks Ss to give the keys
- Corrects & comments.


Time: (15 ms)


<b>-Working in pairs to write the write</b>
the answer in the words:


- Comparing the keys & Giving the
keys


- Correcting the keys & the mistakes.


<b>1.</b> 8 + 9 = ( Seventeen )


<b>2.</b> 20 - 13 = ( Seven )


<b>3.</b> 33 + 15 = ( Forty-eight )
<b>4.</b> 54 : 3 = ( Eighteen )
<b>5.</b> 7 x 5 = ( Thirty-five )
<b>2. Write the complete sentences:</b>


-Introduces the requirement & the exercise &
Asks Ss to work in pairs to do write the
complete sentences.


- Asks Ss to compare the keys.
- Asks Ss to give the keys
- Corrects & comments.
* Cues:


1. There / a river / near / my school..
2. My father / engineer.


3. What / you / do / after school.
4. We / waiting / for / a train..


5.There / rice paddy / in front of / my house.


<b>-Working in pairs to do write the </b>
complete sentences.


- Comparing the keys & Giving the


keys


- Correcting the keys & the mistakes.
* Answer keys:


1. There is a river near my school..
3. My father is an engineer.


3. What do you do after school.
4. We are waiting for a train..
5.There is a rice paddy in front of
my house..


<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2ms ):</b>
- Asks Ss to summarize the lesson.


<b>V.Homework</b>:(2ms)


- Study the grammar & the modal sentence re-do the test at home.
- Prepare vocabulary & the pictures on page 96


s.Preparing's day:14/8/2011


<b>Period: 2 Unit 1 : back to school{5ps}</b>


<b>Lesson 1 : Friends < A1, A3-5 > P.10-12</b>


<b>A .Aims : Help ss to make greeting and introduction with their friends.</b>


<b>B . Objectives .-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to make greeting </b>
and introduction with their friends.



<b>I. Knowledge . - Revision of simple present with : </b>
<b>-</b> "Nice to meet you"
<b>-</b> "How is everything?"


<b>-</b> "just fine" / "not bad"/ "Pretty good"
<b>II. Skills : - Speaking and reading skill.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

<b>D .Materials: Radio ,textbook,pictuers,workbook,in English .</b>


<b>E .Anticipated problems : Ss may when they introduce.T can do an example</b>
<b> F. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting</b>


- Check attendence.
<b> II- Revision.(5ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "slap the boarb": ( Ss listen and slap the suitable response)
<b>-</b> Put the new words all over the black-board.


<b>-</b> Call two students or 2 teams of Ss to the front of the class. Ask
them to stand at an equal distance from the black-board.


<b>-</b> Teacher calls out of the new words (in VietNamese) in aloud
voice, the two Ss must run forward and slap the word on the
black-board. The one who first slaps the correct word is the
winner. If the Ss play in team,the winning team gets a mark.
Then ask two more Ss to come forward,etc...


Good bye yes,I am



Class 7A Very well,thanks My name's Hoa
a.What's your name?


b.How are you today ?
c.What class are you in ?
d.goodbye


e.Are you a new student?
<b>III- New lesson .</b>


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Practice.(20ms)</b>


<b>a.Matching</b>


<b>-Put the poster on the board and ask Ss to match</b>
the words or phrases in column A to column B
. A B


a.Pretty good 1.Kh«ng tèt l¾m
b.How is everything 2.T«i cịng vËy
c.Nice to see you 3.Kh¸ tèt


d.So am I/ me, too 4.Mäi viÖc nh thÕ nµo
e.Just fine 5.Rất vui khi gặp bạn
f.Not bad 6.Bìmh thờng thôi
-Ask Ss to go to the board and draw the line to
correct the words.



<b>b.Gap- filling " A4 a)-b) p.12-13"</b>


-Ask Ss to use the word given to complete the
dialogue(a) P.12 and dialogue (b) P.13


-Provide some words so that Ss can use them to
fill in the gap.


How are you today? Just fine So am I


How are you? Not bad Me,too


How is everything? Preey
good
How about you? OK


-Ss match the words or


phrases in column A to column
B


-Ss work on their own first
then compare with their
partners.


-Ss listen and check.


-Ss listen and write the letters
of the dialogue in the order
they hear.



*Answer key:


(a)Mr.Tan: ... How are
you?


Miss Lien : Pretty


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

<b>c.Picture cue drill</b>


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
-Prepare 4 picture so that Ss can drill easily.
- A5 p.13


(Ss use the cues above)
<b>2.Production (17ms)</b>


<i> -"Mapped dialogue"</i>
<i>-</i>Set a scene



-Put the mapped dialogue chart on the board
-Elicit the exchanges from Ss


-Have some pairs practice each exchange
before going on to another exchange.


-After finishing the dialogue,ask a good pair to
demmonstrate the whole dialogue.


*Open pair:


-Ask some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue.
*Closed pairs:


-Ask Ss to work in pairs, replacing the
information using the tables.


-Monitor and correct.


T asks Ss to use the new greetings expressions
from matching


Ba Nam


....morning... ...morning...
Nice...again.


...,too. How...?..., ...thanks...about...?
...thank you.



goodbye. See... See


everything?


Nga: Ok,....How are you
today,...?


Nam:Just fine,....
Nga:...


Nam:...So am I.
-Ss practice well


Ss repeat in chorus & in
individual.


Ss make sentences for the next
Ss checks & S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


-Ss use the new greeting
expressions from the
matching.


-Ss practice well.


-Some pairs practice each
exchange before going on to
another exchange.



-After finishing the dialogue,
some a good pair to


demmonstrate the whole
dialogue.


-Take notes.
<b> IV.Consolidation(1m)</b>


-T calls some pairs to practice the dialogue.
- Ask Ss to give the question & the answer .


- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
<b> V.Homework.(2ms)</b>


- Study the dialogue by heart.


-Doing exercise :1,2 P.3-4 (work book)
-Preparing :Unit1:A2


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

<b>Preparing's day: 15/8/2011 </b>


<b>Period: 3 Unit 1 : back to school</b>


<b>Lesson 2 : Friends < A2 > P.11</b>


<b>A .Aims : By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the detail </b>
and revising simple present, comparisions, a lot of/many.


<b>B . Objectives :</b>



<b> I. Knowledge .-Revision of simple present with : comparisions, a lot of /many.</b>
<b> II. Skills . -Reading, speaking skills</b>


<b>C.Ways of working : T-wc,ss-ss,individual work. </b>
<b>D .Materials: Pictures page 11-13in English 7.</b>


<b>E .Anticipated problems: Ss may have difficulty in pronunciation of the word </b>
“different”.T can pronuce it slowly.


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision.(5ms)</b>


<i>-"</i>Wordsquare<i> " </i>


<i>-</i>Put the wordsquare poster on the board and inform the topic.


<i>-</i>Divide the class into 2 teams.


<b>-</b> Ask ss to find 11 hidden words and write them on the peice of
paper.


<b>-</b> Tell Ss the team to find out the most right words will get 2
points.


Aunt,friend
school,big,new,old,uncle
parents.



student,happy,live


S C H O O L D


T T B I G H N


U N C L E A E


D U J I T P I


E A S V N P R


N E W E U Y F


S T N E R A P



III- New lesson .


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1.Pre-reading.(7ms)</b>


<b>a.Pre-teach</b>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.


-different < adj > kh¸c nhau (antonym)
> < the same



-unhappy < adj > không hạnh phóc > <
happy (antonym)


-(to) miss : nhí (antonym) > < forget


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus
& in individual. Correcting the
mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

meaning & the prounciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>b.Checking vocab.</b>



<b>-</b> R.O.R
<b>c.T/F statement prediction</b>


-Hang the poster of T/F statements on the
board and ask Ss to work in pairs and guess
which statements are true and which are
false.


a)Hoa is from Hue


b)She lives with her parents in Ha Noi
c)She has a lot of friends in Ha Noi
d)She misses her friends in Hue
e)She is happy now.


-Give feedback.


<b>2.While-reading(20ms)</b>


a.Ss read and correct their predictons
-Ask Ss to read the text on P.11 and check
their prediction.


-Have Ss correct false statements.
Guess Answer Correction


A T


b F She lives with her



uncle and aunt in
HaNoi


C F Sh has a lot of friends


in Hue


d T


E F She is unhappy now.


<b>b.Comprehension questions</b>


<b>-Give Ss some questions in (A2 P.11 a)-e))</b>
and ask them to work in pairs to answer
them


-T gives a game "Hangman" to ask and
answer the questions.


*Answer key:
a)She is from hue.


b)She is staying with her uncle and aunt.
c)No,She doesn't have any friends in Ha Noi.
d)Her new school is bigger than her old
school.


e)She is unhappy because she misses her


parents and her friends.


-Let some pairs of Ss to ask and answer the
questions (Open pairs)


-Let all Ss work in pairs (closed pairs)
<b>3. Post-reading(10ms)</b>


- "Transformation writing" (from the text A2
P.11)


-For weak Ss: change"Hoa" to "I"


-For strong Ss: change the information and
change" Hoa" to "I"


-T controls and corrects.


-Ss close their book and predict
the sentences


-Ss open their book and read the
text then correct their answers


-Ss play well ( whole class)
-Ss work well.


-Take notes.


-Ss work in pairs to answer the


questions.


-Ss play the game "Hangman"
well.


-Take notes.


-Ss work individually-share with
your partner.


-Read the text you have just
done.


<b> IV.Consolidation(1m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to read their text.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
-Doing exercise : 3 P.4-5 (work book)


-Preparing :Unit1: B1-3


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

<b>week: 2</b>



<b>Preparing's day: 16/8/2011</b>


<b>Period: 4 Unit 1 : back to school</b>



<b>Lesson 3 : Names and Addresses < B1-3 >P.15-16</b>




<b>A .Aims . Help ss to ask and give personal information( name, age, address) .</b>
<b>B . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to ask and give </b>
personal information( name, age, address)


<b>I. Knowledge . Personal information ( name, age, address). </b>
<b>II. Skill . - Reading & speaking skills.</b>


<b>C .Ways of working:T-wc,gw,pw,ss-ss.</b>


<b>D .materials: VCD,radio ,pictures ,cue-words</b>


<b>E .Anticipated problems: Ss will be shy in speaking and have difficulty in </b>
writing .T can explain the request.


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision.(3ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "Noughts and Crosses": ( Ss ask and answer about the
information given in the grids)


Ex: S1: How old are you ? you /13 54 Quang Trung St. Hoa
S2: I'm 13.


her mother Your father Le Loi
street
Linh 41


19 Hung Nam grand-



Vuong mother


<b>III- New lesson .</b>


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1.Pre-reading.(7ms)</b>


<b>a.Pre-teach</b>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.


-family name (n)hä(example) (the first name)
-middle name (n) tªn lãt (example)


-an address : địa chỉ (example) ( where you
live)


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the prounciation.



- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>b. Checking vocab.</b>


- R.O.R


<b>c.Presentation dialogue</b>
- B1 P.15


<b>d.Comprehension questions</b>


-T gives ss some questions in "B1 a)-d)
P.15' and ask them to play a game "shack
attact" to ask and answer the questions
*Answer key:


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus
& in individual. Correcting the
mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss playing well.


-Ss listen then read the dialogue
carefully.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

a)She is talking to Miss Lien.
b)Her family name is Pham.
c)Her middle name is Thi.


d)She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street.
- Let some pairs of Ss to ask and answer the
questions (Open pairs)


-Let all Ss work in pairs (closed pairs)
<b>2. Practice(20ms)</b>


<b>a.Word cue drill.</b>


T asks Ss depend on the model in the


dialogue then put the orther dialogue (Ss use
the cue work)


Modle sentences:


S1:What is Nam's family name?
S2:His family name is Nguyen.
S1:How old is he?


S2:He is 15 years old.
S1:Where does he live?


S2:He lives at 32 Nguyen Du street.
a)Nam/nguyen/15/32 nguyen Du st.


b)Hoa/ Pham/ 12/ Da nang


c)Minh/ Tran/ 13/ tran hung Dao


d)Thuy/ Bui/ 14/ 37 Le Hong Phong st.
e)Hung/ Phan/ 16/ 64 Le Qui Don st.
-Model two cues then ask Ss to repeat
chorally the individually.


-Ask some Ss to practice asking and
answering.


-Ask the whole class to work in pair.
<b>b.Complete the dialogue</b>


-Ask some questions to set the scene:
*Who are they?


*What are they talking?


*Does Hoa live on Tran Hung Dao street?
*etc...


-Ask Ss to read the dialogue and fill the
missing words in the dialogue B2 P.16.
-Let Ss work in pairs.


-Give feedback.
<b>3. Production(10ms)</b>
-B3 P.16



T asks Ss to ask your patner qs and fill in the
form.


Name:...
Age:...
Grade:...
School:...
Home address:...
-T & ss correct.


-Some pairs of Ss to ask and
answer the questions (Open
pairs)


- Ss work in pairs (closed pairs)
-Ss open their book and use the
cue words to practice well


-Ss play well


-Ss listen to the model two cues
then Ss repeat chorally the
individually.


- Ss practice asking and
answering.


- whole class work in pair.



-Ss read the dialogue and fill the
missing words in the dialogue
B2 P.16.


-Let Ss work in pairs.
-Give feedback.
<b>Answer key:</b>


Who, Who, What, Where,
Where, How


-Ss answer the questions.


-Ss read the dialogue and fill the
missing words in the dialogue
B2 P.16.


-Ss ask your patner qs and fill in
the form.


<b> IV.Consolidation(1m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to read their text.


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b> V.Homework.(2ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

-Preparing :Unit1:B4,5-7


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

<b>Preparing's day: 21/8/2011 </b>




<b>Period: 5 Unit 1 : back to school</b>



<b>Lesson 4 : Names and Addresses < B4-5 > P.16-17</b>
<b>A . Aims . Help Ss to talk about distances .</b>


<b>B. Objectives . By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about </b>
distances


I. Knowledge .


<b>-</b> Using "How far...?" question and answer with
"kilometers/meters"


<b>II. Skill . -Reading & speaking skill.</b>
<b>C .Ways of working : T-wc ,gw,individually</b>
<b>D . Materrials : VCD,radio ,pictures p13.</b>


<b>E .Anticipated problems: Ss may have difficulty in listening .T can help them to</b>
predict before listening.


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision.(3ms)</b>


<i>-</i>Put the wordsquare poster on the board and inform the topic.


<i>-</i>Divide the class into 2 teams.



-Ask ss to find 11 hidden words and write them on the peice of paper.
-Tell Ss the team to find out the most right words will get 2 points.
W W W H Y


H W H E N


E B A O N


R Y T O W


E F R O M


-Wordsquare : why, when, on, to, from
who, how


what, where, at, by
<b> III- New lesson .</b>


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1.Presentation.(10ms)</b>


<b>a.Pre-teach</b>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.


-far <adj > xa > < near ( antonym )
- how far : bao xa


-distance < n > khoảng cách



- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>b. Checking vocab. - R.O.R</b>


<b>c.Presentation dialogue- B4 P.16-17</b>
<b>d.Model sentences:</b>


-T sets a scene to give the model sentences.
S1: How far is it from your house to school?
S2:About one kilometer./ 700 metrers.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus
& in individual. Correcting the
mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.



- Copying the words.


-Ss play well.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

*Concept checking:


Form: How far is it + from +S1+to +S2 ?
Use: talk about distances .


<b>e.Comprehension questions</b>


-Ask Ss to work in pairs and answer some
questions . -Give feedback.


a) Where does Hoa live ?(12Tran Hung Dao)
b) Is it far from school ? (No)


c) How far does she get there ? (By bike)
*Answer key:


a)She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street.
b)No,it isn't.


c)She gets there by bike.


-Ask Ss to prctice asking and answering
questions.


<b>2. Practice(20ms)</b>



- "Picture drill." - B5 P.17


T asks Ss to depend on the model sentences
(Ss use the pictures to practice)


-Model two pictures then ask Ss to repeat
chorally then individually.


-Ask some Ss to practice asking and
answering.


-Ask the whole class to work in pairs.
<b>3.Production (10ms)</b>


-T asks ss to write B5, P.16 in the notebook.
-T asks ss to change the answer to correct
their mistakes.


-Ss practice and give the concept
check.


-Ss play well.


-Copy down on their note books.


-Ss open their book and use the
picture practice well


-Ss depend on the model


sentences


+ Market / 2 kms


+ Post office / 700 meters
+ movie theater / 1 km
+ Bus stop / 5oo meters
-Ss repeat chorally then
inividually.


-Ss practice asking and
answering.


-whole class to work in pairs.
<b>Example:</b>


S1:How far is ti from your house
to the market?


S2;It's 3 kms. ...etc...
- Ss listen and takes notes.
-Ss taking notes.


<b> IV.Consolidation(1m) -T asks Ss to read the model sentences andgive the </b>
concept check . - Ask Ss to give the question used to ask the distance.
<b> How far is it + from +S1+to +S2 ?</b>


- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.


<b> V.Homework.(1m) - - Learning by heart vocabulary and the model </b>



sentence( form, use ) -Doing exercise : 4 P.5 (work book) --Preparing :Unit1 . B
6-7


THE END
<b>Preparing's day: 18/8/2011</b>


<b>Period: 6 Unit 1 : back to school</b>



<b>Lesson 5 : Names and Addresses < B6-7 > P.18</b>


<b>A .Aims . Help ss to talk about name, address, means of transport, distances .</b>
<b>B . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about </b>
name, address, means of transport, distances .


I. Knowledge .


<b>-</b> Using "How do you go to school?"" what's your name/ middle
name/ family name ? "How far...?" ..question and answer.
<b>II. Skill .- listening skill.</b>


<b>C .Ways of working : T-wc ,pw ,gw.</b>
<b>D ..Materials: Word-cue and pictuers.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

<b>F . Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting.</b>
<b>II- Revision.</b>
<b> III- New lesson .</b>


Teacher's activities Students'activities


<b>1.Pre-listening.(10ms)</b>


<b>a.Pre-teach</b>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.
-mean (n) ph¬ng tiƯn ( explain)
-transport (n) giao thông( explain)
-theater (n) nhà hát ( example )


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the prounciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>b. Checking vocab.</b>


- what and where
<b>c.Lead in.</b>


-T gives the picture and ask ss to give the
places in this pictures.



-T asks some questions.


+Is Lan's house near the market?
+ Is Lan's house far from school?
+Is Lan's house near the post office?
...etc.


-T asks ss to take note the model:
How far is it from...to...?


It's...(kilo)meters.
<b>d. Pre-questions</b>


T gives 4 questions and asks ss to think
about the answers.


1. How far is it from Lan's house to school?
2. How far is it from Lan's house to the post
office?


3. How far is it from school to the movie
theater?


4. How far is it from movie theater to post
office ?


<b>2. While-listening(20ms)</b>


-T turns on the tape(2-3-4) times
-T asks ss to work in groups to do.


-T calls ss to answer.


<b>3.Post-listening (10ms)</b>
"survey" - B7 P.18


-Ask ss to copy down the chart (on P.18):
-Ask Ss to work in groups of three to ask
their friend and tick on the chart.


-Give feedback by asking Ss to report their


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus
& in individual. Correcting the
mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss play well.


-Ss listen then read the dialogue
carefully.


Answer:


-Lan's house, school, post office,


market, theater.


-Ss guess the answer.


-Ss read the questions and think
the way to answer the questions.


-Ss work in 4 groups to do.
Answer key:


1.It's 300meters
2.It's 700 meters.
3.It's 3 kilometers.
4.It's 2 kilometers.


-Copy down on their note books.
-Ss play well


-Ss orally report back.


-Ex: My friend is Dung. She lives
at 8 Le Qui Don street. It's about
3 kilometers from her house to
her school.Sh


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

friends'hobbies.


Eg: My friend is Dung. She lives at 8 Le Qui
Don street. It's about 3 kilometers from her
house to her school....



-T asks Ss to ask your patner qs and fill in
the form.


Ex:


*What's your name?
*Where do you live?


*How far is it from your house to school?
*How do you go to school?


1 2 3
Name Dung


Address 8LeQuiDon st
Distance 3km




Transport bike -T controls and corects.


the qs.
-Take notes


-Ss ask your patner questions and
fill in the form.


-Ss taking notes.



<b> IV.Consolidation(1m) -T asks Ss to read the model sentences andgive the </b>
concept check. - Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
<b> V.Homework .(1m) - Learning by heart vocabulary and the model </b>


sentence( form, use ) - Doing exercise : 5 P.5 (work book) - Preparing :Unit2 .
A1-3


THE END

<b>week: 3</b>



<b>Preparing's day: 28/8/2011 </b>


<b>Period: 7 Unit 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION{6Ps }</b>


<b>Lesson 1 : TELEPHONE NUMBER <A1,2,3> 19-20</b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to ask and give telephone
numbers and further practice in addresses.


I. Knowledge .


<b>-</b> Telephone numbers and addresses.
<b> II. Skill</b>


- Reading , listening & speaking .
<b>B.Ways of working :T-wc ,pw ,gw </b>
.


<b>C.Materials :Pictures at p20 ,radio ,VCD .</b>



<b>D .Anticipated prolems ;Ss may have difficulty in listening and writing . </b>
Tcan help them to predict before listening .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b> I.Greeting </b>


<b> II- Revision. (3ms)</b>


<b>- B 6 P.18 (Ss listen and write the 4 distances)</b>
(1) Lan's house(2)


school the post office
(3) the theater(4)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

4. 2kms


<b> III- New lesson .</b>


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1.Presentation.(10ms)</b>


<b>a.Pre-teach</b>


-(to) call : gäi ( action )


-(to) call somebody : gọi ai đó
Ex: call Lan/ my mother.


- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.



- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the prounciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
<b>b. Checking vocab.</b>


- R.O.R


<b>c.Presentation text</b>


- Introduces & Asks Ss to read the text.
- Checks S’s reading.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments


- A3 P.20


<b>d.Model sentences:</b>


T sets a sence to give the model
sentences.



<b>S1: What's your telephone </b>
number ?


his
her
<b>S2:< 825455>.</b>
<b>2.Practice(20ms)</b>


- Introduces the example exchange &
Hepls Ss to practice.


- Reads the first modal for example &
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in
individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the
next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


<b>-"Word cue drill"</b>


<b>-</b> A1 P.19-20
-Van anh/553646



-Qui Bang/825211


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss play well.
- Reading the text.


- Correcting the pronunciation.


-Ss play well.


-Ss use the word cue to practice well


<i><b>- Repeating in chorus & in individual.</b></i>
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

-Xuan Ba/852637
-Mai Le/630069



T asks Ss to depend on the model
sentences (Ss use the word cue to
practice)


<b>3.Further practice "Noughts and </b>
Crosses"


- Introduces the way to practice &
devides the class into 2 groups to
practice.


- Helps Ss to practice.
- Corrects & comments
* Ss use these questions:
1. What’s her/his name ?


2. What’s her/his telephone number ?
3. Where does he/she live ?


<b>4.Production.(7ms) "survey"</b>
P.20


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss
to work in pairs to interview each other
& take note the information.


- Asks Ss to report the imformation
about their friends.



- Corrects & comments.


Name Address telephone
number


Lan 12 le loi 853444


....
....


-Ss enjoy the game
- Practicing in groups.


- Correcting the answer keys.
A/821


1800


6 Nguyen
Cong Tru


Viet Anh
13 Hang


Dong


Bich/
8231263



34 Tran
Phu


Thi Bang Cong Bao/
782 1652


Thach
Anh


- Working in pairs to interview each
other & taking note the information.
- Reporting the imformation about
their friends.


<b>IV.Consolidation(2ms)</b>


- Ask Ss to give the question used to ask the telephone number.
S1: What [ his/ her] telephone number ?


S2: [7685098].


- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson


-T asks Ss to read the model sentences and give the concept check.
<b> V.Homework.(3ms)</b>


: - Study the modal exchange .


- Doing exercise : 1 P.5 (work book)
-Preparing :Unit2: A4-5



<i><b>THE END</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

<b>Preparing's day: 28/8/2011</b>


<b>Period: 8 Unit 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>



<b>Lesson 2 :TELEPHONE NUMBER <A4 , 7 + remember> P.21-23</b>


<b>A . Aims . Help ss to talk about sure events in the future.Practice in using the</b>
“Will” future positive statements & “Wh” questions. By the end of this lesson, Ss
understand the way to use these modals to talk about sure events in the future
<b> B. Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about sure</b>
events in the future.


-Helps Ss to practice in using the “Will” future positive statements &
“Wh” questions. By the end of this lesson, Ss understand the way to use these
modals to talk about sure events in the future


I. Knowledge . The "will" future, positive statements and "WH"questions.
<b> II. Skill . Reading & speaking drill.</b>


<b>B. Ways of working :T wc ,ss-ss ,indi…. </b>
<b>C .Materials :Radio ,chalk ,</b>


<b>D .Anticipated prolems :Ss may have difficulty in using simple future tense .</b>
can explain it .


E. Proceduce.
<b> I.Greeting </b>



<b> II- Revision. (3ms)</b>
-Jumbled words


- Asks Ss to re-order the letters to form the right words
ese =see trast =start vomei =movie
romtprow = tomorrow tale = late rehatte=theater
III- New lesson


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>1.Presenttation.(10ms)</b>


<b>a.Pre-teach.</b>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.
-(to) meet : gỈp = see ( antonym )
-free < adj > r·nh rỗi > < busy
( synonym )


Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the prounciation.



- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
<b>b.Presentation dialogue. (reading).</b>
T asks ss to tead the dialogue carefully
to get the main ideas.


- Introduces & helps Ss to read the
dialogue.


- Checks S’s reading.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


- Reading the dialogue.


- Correcting the pronunciation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

comments.


-A4 P.21


<b>c. Comprehension questions.</b>
-A4 P.21


- Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer the questions.
- Asks Ss to give the answers &
corrects.


<b>* Questions:</b>


a. Who will meet tomorrow ?


- Working in pairs to answer the
questions.


- Giving the answers & correcting.
<b>* Answers:</b>


a. Phong and Tam.


b. What will they do ?


c. What time will they meet ?
d. Where wil they meet ?


b. See a movie.
c. At 6.45.



d. In front of the movie
theater.


<b>d. Model sentences:</b>


-T sets a sence to give the model
sentences.


S1: Where will we meet ?


S2: We'll meet in front of the movie
theater.


Form: Where + Will + S + V(inf) ?
S + Will +V(inf) + O


Use:Ask and answer about the future.
<b>2.Practice.(17ms)</b>


a. "substitution drill."


- Introduces the content & reads the modal to
helps Ss replace.


- Practices with Ss in individual.
- Corrects S’s mistakes & comments.
<b>* Teacher says:</b>


<b>- Where will we meet ?</b>
<b>- you.</b>



<b>- What time</b>
<b>- go</b>


<b>- How</b>


<b>- What / see</b>


<b>b."Word cue drill."</b>


- Introduces the example exchange & Hepls Ss
to practice.


- Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
-Where/ meet? in the street


-Ss give the concept check.


-Ss copy the"Model & form &
use"on their notebook and
learn by heart.



- Replacing the given words.
- Practicing with the teacher in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.
<b> Students replace:</b>


<b>- Where will we meet ?</b>
<b>- Where will you meet ?</b>
<b>- What time will you meet ?</b>
<b>- What time will you go ?</b>
<b>- How will you go ?</b>


<b>- What will you see ?</b>


<i><b>- Repeating in chorus & in</b></i>
individual.


- Making sentences for the
next cues.


- Practicing in groups & in
pairs .


- Correcting the


pronunciation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

-What time/ meet? at 7:00
-What/see? a film



-How/go ? by bike
Ex:


S1: Where will we meet ?
S2: We'll meet in the street.
<b>3.Further practice.(10ms)</b>
- A5 P.21


- Asks ss to listen to the content & get the
information & fill in the table.


- Asks Ss to give the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
* Keys: a. 8 537 471.
b. a movie.
c. 6.45.
d. by bike.


<i><b>- [ We’ll ] meet in the street.</b></i>
* Cues:


Where / meet ? - in the street.
What time/ meet ? - at 7.00.
What/ see ? - a film.


How/ go ? - by bike.


- Listening to the content &
getting the information &


filling in the table.


- Giving the answers.


- Correcting the answer keys.
aTelephone


number:...
Theywill see:...
c. They will meet at:...
d. They will go by:...
<b>IV.Consolidation(3ms)</b>


-T asks Ss to read the model sentences and give the concept check.
- Ask Ss to give the question used to ask the “Will” future positive
statements & “Wh” questions..


* Where will we meet ? - We’ll meet...
<i><b> * What time will we meet ? - We’ll...</b></i>


- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V.Homework.(2ms)</b>


- Study the modal exchange


-Doing exercise : 3 P.5 (work book)
-Preparing :Unit2: A6-7


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

<b>Preparing's day:29 /8/2010</b>



<b>Period : 9 Unit 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>



<b>Lesson 3 : TELEPHONE NUMBERS < A6-7 > P.22-23</b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about sure events
in the future.


<b> I.Knowledge : -The "will" future.</b>


<b> II. Skills : - Reading and speaking drill.</b>
<b> B . Ways of working :T –wc ,ss-ss ,indi…..</b>
<b> C .Materials :Radio, pictuers ,posters .</b>


<b> D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in making an </b>
arrangement .T can make an example .:


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b> I.Greeting</b>


<b>II- Revision.</b>
<b>III- New lesson .</b>


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>3.Production (10ms)</b>


<i> -"Mapped dialogue"</i>
<i>-</i>Set a scene


-Put the mapped dialogue chart on the


board


-Elicit the exchanges from Ss
-Have some pairs practice each
exchange before going on to another
exchange.


-After finishing the dialogue,ask a good
pair to demmonstrate the whole


dialogue.
*Open pair:


-Ask some pairs to demonstrate the
dialogue.


*Closed pairs:


-Ask Ss to work in pairs, replacing the
information using the tables.


-Monitor and correct.


T asks Ss to use the new greetings
expressions from matching


Tan Nam
What...do tomorow


morning?



go...stadium.
What...watch? a football match/


Would...like...with me ?


Yes. When...start? 4:30/...meet at
4:15.


-Some pairs practice each exchange
before going on to another exchange
-SS practice in pairs to demonstrate the
dialogue


-Ss work in pairs, replacing the
information using the tables.


-Ss use the new greetings expressions
from matching


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

Where...meet? in front
of...stadium.


OK !


<b> IV.Consolidation(3ms)</b>


-T calls some pairs to practice the dialogue.
<b> V.Homework.(2ms)</b>



-Doing exercise : (work book)
-Preparing :Unit2:B 1-3,9


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

<b>week: 4</b>



<b> Preparing's day : 4/9/2011</b>



<b>Period: 10 Unit 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>


<b>Lesson 4: MY BIRTHDAY <B1-3,9>P.24-25-28</b>


<b>A .Aims : Help ss talk about dates of a year and the pronunciation.</b>


<b>B . Objectives : -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about </b>
dates of a year and the pronunciation.


I. Knowledge . The dates of a year and the pronunciation
<b> II. Skill . -Reading & speaking drill.</b>


<b>C . Ways of working :T- wc ;pw ;gw .</b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Materials : A big calen dar ,a poster .</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : Ss will have difficulty in listening the word “twelfth </b>
“.T can help them .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b> I.Greeting </b>



<b> II- Revision. (3ms)</b>


-"Pelmanism"


1st 2nd 10th 5th 3rd 9th
first second third fifth ninth tenth
<b> III- New lesson .</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>1.Presentation.(10ms)</b>


<b>a. Pre -teach.</b>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.
-twelfth =12th : ngµy 12
-twentieth = 20th : ngµy 20
-twenty-first = 21st :ngµy 21
-thirtieth = 30th :ngµy 30
-thirty-first =31st :ngµy 31


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the


meaning & the prounciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b. Checking vocabulary.


T gives 2 games to check vocab.
-" R.O.R"


-"Jumbled words"


nb: T uses these two because the spelling
and the pronunciation are both important.
<b>c.Guess from the new words</b>


-B1 P.24


Months of a year.


T gives a game "Matching " to practice.
January thang 10


february thang 7
march thang 5
April thang 12
May thang 1
June thang 4
July thang 9
august thang 2
September thang 6



- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus &
in individual. Correcting the
mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the game.


- Guessing the months of the year.
- Matching the months.


- Correcting the keys.


January Tháng
10


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

October thang 11
November thang3
December thang 8


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
guess the months of the year.


- Asks Ss to match the months.
- Corrects & comments.



<b>2.practice(20ms)</b>


<b> Listen & write. B2- P24.</b>


- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
listen to the dates & copy down.


- Asks Ss to work in pairs to compare the
dates which they copied.


- Asks Ss to listen to the dates again &
check


- Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects.
<b>4. Write in order: B3- P24.</b>


- Asks Ss to -read the months & put them in
the order from first to twelve.


- Asks Ss to compare the keys.
- Asks Ss to to give the key.
- Corrects & comments
<b>3.Production(10ms)</b>
-"survey"


Name Birthday
Thao July 19th


... ...



-T contrls and corrects


March Tháng 5
April Tháng
12


May Tháng
1


June Tháng
4


July Tháng 9
August Tháng
2


September Tháng
6


October Tháng
11


November Tháng
3


December Tháng
8


- Listening to the dates & copying




down.-- Working in pairs to compare the
dates which they copied.


- Giving the answers & correcting.
- Reading the months & putting
them in the order from first to
twelve.


- Comparing the keys.
- Giving the key.


-Ss listen and write the dates
-Ss erite the months in order from
first to twelfth.


Ex:


S1: What's your name ?
S2: My name's Thao


S1: When's your birthday?
S2: July 19th.


-Take notes.
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


- Ask Ss to give the dates & the months of the year.



- Ask Ss to give the question & the answer used to ask the birthday.
S1: When’s your birthday ?


S2: [ July 19th<sub> ]</sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

<b>V.Homework.(1ms)</b>


- Study the modal exchange .


- Practice writing the celemonies of the year & the months in the four
seasons.


- Prepare the Calendar.
-Preparing : Unit 2 : B4-5.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

<b>Preparing's day: 4/9/2011</b>


<b>Period :11 Unit 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>


<b>Lesson 5: MY BIRTHDAY <B4-5> P.25-26</b>


<b>A .Aims : Help ss talk about the detail about factual information.</b>


<b>B . Objectives : -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understant the </b>
detail about factual information.


I. Knowledge . The Factual information .
<b> II. Skill . -Reading & speaking drill.</b>
<b>C . Ways of working :T- wc ;pw ;gw .</b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Materials : A big calen dar ,a poster .</b>


<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : Ss will have difficulty answering the questions .</b>
.T can help them .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting </b>
<b>II- Revision. </b>
<b>III.New lesson</b>


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Pre-reading. (12ms)</b>


<b>a.Pre teach.</b>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.


-Date of birth. ngµy sinh (example)
-(to) worry : lo l¾ng (mime)


-nervous : lo l¾ng(mime)
-won't = Will not. sÏ kh«ng


- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).



- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb &
checks the meaning & the
prounciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the
words.


<b>b.Checking vocab.</b>


<b>-</b> 'Slap the board"
<b>c.Open prediction</b>


- Asks Ss to predict the information
about Hoa & fill in the form.


- Asks Ss to give their prediction.
- Comments


<b>2. While-reading.(20ms)</b>


- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss
to listen to the dialogue


- Asks Ss to work in pairs to


- Listening to the words.



- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the games.


<b>- Predicting the information about Hoa</b>
& filling in the form.


<b>- Giving their prediction.</b>


- Listening to the information about
Hoa & copying


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

compare the information about Hoa
which they copied.


- Asks Ss to listen to the information
about Hoa again & check


- Asks Ss to give the answers &
corrects.


* Keys: Student Registration
Form


Name: Pham Thi Hoa


Date of birth: June Eight.
Address: 12 THD Street
Tel: 8 262 019


- Introduces the questions & asks Ss
to work in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.


- Asks Ss to give the answer keys.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
<b>a. Ss listen to B4 P.25 then check </b>
their prediction.


-T turns on the tape and ask Ss to
close their books and listen the tape
carefully.


 Answer key.
Registration form student
Name: Pham thi Hoa
Date of birth: June 8th


Adress: 12 Tran Hung Dao street.
<b>b.Comprehension questions.</b>
* Questions:


a. How old is Hoa now ?


b. How old will she be on her next
birthday?



c. When is hee birthday ?
d. Who does Hoa live with ?.
e. Why is Hoa worried ?.


-T gives 5 qs in B4 P.25 a)-e) to ask
Ss to play a game " Hangman" to ask
and answer the qs.


<b>3. Post-reading.(10ms)</b>
-"Write it up"


- Introduces the requirement & asks
Ss to work in pairs to ask & answer
about the police record on part 8 page
41 (language focus 1)


- Asks Ss to write the information
about themselves B4- P25 ( f-h ).


- Checking information about Hoa.
- Giving the answers & correcting.
Student Registration Form


Name:...
Date of birth:...
Address:...
Tel:...


- Working in pairs to ask & answer


the questions.


- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting


* Answer:


a. She is 13 years old now..


b. She will be14 on her next birthday.
c. It’s in June eighth


d. She lives with her uncle & aunt.
e. Because she doesn’t have any
friends.


- Working in pairs to ask & answer
about the police record on part 8 page
41 (language focus 1)


- Writing the information about
themselves.


- Giving their writing.
Police Record


Name:...
...



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

- Asks Ss to give their writing.
- Corrects & comments.


Address:...
...




Job:...
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to read their writing.


- Ask Ss to give the dates & the months of the year.


- Ask Ss to give the question & the answer used to ask the birthday.
- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V.Homework.(1ms)</b>


- Study the dialogue by heart & answer the questions f-h p.5 .
-Writing the student form base on the form B5 - p26


-Preparing : Unit 2 : B 6-8


...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

<b>Preparing's day: 6/9/2011</b>



<b>Period: 12 Unit 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>


<b> Lesson 6: MY BIRTHDAY <B6-7> P.26-27</b>


<b>A . Aims :Help ss understant the way to write an invitation to a party.</b>


<b>B . Objectives : -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understant the</b>
way to write an invitation to a party.


<b> I. Knowledge : - Writing an invitation to a party.</b>
<b> II. Skill : - Writing skill</b>


<b>C . Ways of working : T – wc ,ss – ss ,indi …</b>


<b>D . Materials : A birthday post card , an invitation card .</b>


<b>E . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in writing invitation . T can </b>
help them .


<b>F . Proceduce.</b>
<b> I.Greeting</b>


<b> II- Revision. (5ms)</b>


-"Lucky number"


1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10


<b>1.What's your family name? 6.What's your date of birth?</b>


<b>2.How old are you? 7.Who do you live with?</b>


<b>3.L</b> 8.How old will you be on your next
birthday?


<b>4.What's your adress?</b> 9L
<b>5.What's your telephone number? 10. L</b>
<b> III. New lesson.</b>


Teacher'activities Students'activities


<b>1. Pre-writing(12ms)</b>
<b>a.Pre teach.</b>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.
-(to) have a party :cã mét bưa tiƯc
-(to) invite : lêi mêi


-an invitation card ( n) thiếp mời
- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the prounciation.



- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>b.Checking vocab.</b>


<b>-</b> R.O.R
<b>c.Comprehension questions.</b>


<b>a)</b> How old is Lan now? (12)
<b>b)</b> How old will she be on next


birthday? (13)


<b>c)</b> When's her birthday? (May
25th)


<b>d)</b> Where will the party be? (At her
house)


<b>e)</b> What's her adress? (24 Ly
Thuong Kiet)


<b>f)</b> How long will the party last?


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the


pronunciation.



- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the game.


- Working in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.


- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting


<b>Answer keys:</b>


a. She's 12 years old


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

(From 5 p:m to 9 p:m)


- Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer the questions.
- Asks Ss to give the answers &
corrects.


<b>2. While- writing.(20ms)</b>
<b>a.Gap fill</b>


-Provide some words so that Ss can use
them to fill in the gap.


- B6 P.27.



<b>b.Questions and answers.</b>


- Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer the questions.
- Asks Ss to give the answers &
corrects.


-B7 P.27 a)-f)


<b>3. Post-writing.(5ms)</b>
<b>-</b> B8 P.27
T controls and corrects.


d. It'll be at her house.


e. She lives at 12 Ly Thuong Kiet.
f. It'll last from 5pm to 9 pm.


-Ss doing well.


- Working in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.


- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting


-Ss work in groups to practice.
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>



-T calls some Ss to read their writing.
<b>V.Homework.(1ms)</b>


-Doing exercise :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

<b>week: 5</b>



<b>Preparing's day:10/9/2011</b>



<b>Period:13 Unit 3 : AT HOME</b>



<b>Lesson 1 : WHAT A LOVELY HOME ! <A1> P.29-31</b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


<b> - Helps Ss to practice in bathroom & kitchen vocabulary. By the end of </b>
this lesson, Ss can describe their bathroom & kitchen.


I. Knowledge .


<b>-</b> Bathrom and kitchen vocab.
<b> II. Skill</b>


-Reading and speaking drill.


<b>B . Ways of working : T –wc ; ss – ss ;indi…</b>
<b>C . Materials : Pictures , radio , vcd .</b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in practising .”What…..! </b>
“ T can help them .



<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b> I.Greeting </b>


<b> II- Revision. (5ms)</b>


- Introduces the game & expalins the
way to play & devides the class into 2
groups to play the game.


<i><b>- Hepls Ss to play the game.</b></i>
- Corrects & comments.


<b>- Playing the game in 2 groups.</b>
- Commenting the game.


<b>* The words for the game: </b>


<i> 1. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (Televition).</i>
<i> 2. _ _ _ _ _ (chair).</i>


<i> 3. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (Picture).</i>


-"shark attact"


Television chair picture stove table
<b>III- New lesson</b>


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Presentation(10ms)</b>



<b>a.Pre teach.</b>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.
-a bathroom : Phòng tắm (picture)
-a kichen : nhà bếp (explaination)
-a sink : chu ra (picture)
-a washing machine :máy giặt (picture)
-a dishwasher : máy rữa chén bát
(picture)


-a dryer : máy sấy tóc (picture)
-brgh(adj):sang


-a tub:bồn tắm (picture)


-a refrigerator : tủ lạnh (picture)


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2


times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the prounciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
<b>b.Checking vocab.</b>


- Introduces the keyword & ask Ss to
work in individual to find out the
information about the topic.


- Asks Ss to compare the information
with their partner & fill in the networks.
- Corrects & comments.


-Set the sence:T points to the picture of
A1 .This is Hoa and Lan :They are
talking about their house .Let predict 3
things in the bathroom 5 things in the
kitchen


T guides ss to listen to the tape of A1
<b>2.Practice(20ms)</b>


<b>T asks ss to read their dialoge and </b>
<b>check thier result (read silently)</b>


<b>T corrects and give feedbacks</b>


<b>T asks ss to take role in the dialogue </b>
<b>and reads</b>


<b>-</b> .
<b>b.Deliberate mistakes.</b>


-(Picture of the kitchen A1 P.30)
This is the picture of the kitchen. The
<b>television is next to the refrigerator. </b>
There's a washing machine between
the dishwasher and the electric stove.
There's a dining table with 5 chairs.
Beside the washing machine is the tub.
-Answer key.


( dishwasher, sink, dryer)


<b>3. further practice.(7ms)</b>
-T asks ss to read the dialogue again and
answer the questions


T remarks and gives feedback
Answerkey:


a.Hoa’s room,bathroom,kithen
b.Because it’s a bright room and nice
pink color.



c.They are a sink,atub and a shower
d.They are washing machine,dryer
,refrigerator,dishwasher,electricstoves
"chain game".


- Working in individual to find out the
information about the topic.


-"Networks" bathrom
House


... ...


-Prediction .


bathroom: kitchen:


1 2 3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.


Answer key:


Bathroom kitchen


1.asink 1.washingmachine
2.atub 2.dryer


3.ashower 3.refrigerator
4.dishwasher


5.electricstove


Ss find the mistakes and correct
Work in pairs


.


Work in pairs


* Comprehension questions


a.Which room do Hoa and Lan talk
about?


b.Why does Lan like Hoa’s room?
c.What’s in the bathroom?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss
to play in two groups to practice talking
about the kitchen.


- Corrects & comments.
Ex:


S1: There's a stove in the kitchen.
S2: There's a stove and a sink in the
kitchen.


S3: ...


-T contrls and corrects.



-Ss practice well.


- Working in individual to talk about
the kitchen.


Model:


S1: There’s a stove in the kitchen.
S2: There’s a stove & a sink in the
kitchen


S2: There’s a stove & a sink & a tub
in the kitchen...


-Ss take notes.
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
- Asks Ss to talk about their kitchen.


-T calls some Ss to read their writing.
<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


- Study the vocabularies & the model by heart .
-Writing write something about your kitchen.
-Doing exercise : 7 (Language focus P.41)
-Preparing : Unit 3 : A-2


...
...


...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

<b>Preparing's day:12/9/2011</b>


<b>Period: 14 Unit 3 : AT HOME</b>



<b>Lesson 2: WHAT A LOVELY HOME ! <A2></b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


-Helps Ss to give compliments with ‘ What + a/an + adj + Noun ! ‘ to
talk about the house. By the end of this lesson, Ss can comment their house
I. Knowledge .


<b>-</b> Giving compliments with "What a/an +adj +noun ! "
<b> II. Skill</b>


-Reading and speaking drill.


<b>B . Ways of working : T – wc ;ss-ss ;indi….</b>
<b>C . Materials : Pictures p 31 . </b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difiiculty in speaking . T can do an </b>
example .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b> I.Greeting</b>


<b>...</b>



Kitchen .... ...


<b> II- Revision. (3ms)</b>
-"networks"


Living-rom ...
... House


<b>...</b>


<b>armchair</b>
<b> III- New lesson</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

<b>1. Presentation.(12ms)</b>
<b>a.Pre teach.</b>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.
-Amazing :(adj) đáng ngạc nhiên
-delicious :(adj) ngon


-interesting : (adj) thó vÞ
-convenient : (adj) tiÖn nghi


-comfortable : (adj) thoải mái/ dễ chịu
-modern : (adj) hiện đại


-awful:(adj) kinh khung
-wet:(adj) am uot


- Introduces the words by explaining the


meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>b.Checking vocab.</b>


<b>-</b> R.O.R
<b>.Model sentences:</b>


-T sets a scene to give the model sentence.
<b> What a beautiful bathroom !</b>
<b> an amazing kitchen !</b>
<b>Form:</b>


<b>What + a/an/ the + adj + noun !</b>
<b> Practice.(15ms)</b>


-a. "Word cue drill"


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.



- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .


-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


 <b>Words cue drill: </b><i><b> </b></i>


<b>-</b> dress/expensive
<b>-</b> restaurant/awful
<b>-</b> day/wet


<b>-</b> party/boring
<b>-</b> movie/bad
Ex:


S1: The dress is expensive.


S2: Yes. What an expensive dress !
b.


-kitchen/ amazing
-armchair/ comfortable
-living-rom/ bright
-dinner/ delicious
-story/ interesting


- Listening to the words.



- Repeating the words in chorus &
in individual. Correcting the


mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss playing well.


- ss give ex


-Ss practice the model sentences
well.


-Ss give the concept check.
-Ss copy down.


-Ss practice well.


<i>Example exchange: </i>
<i> </i>S1: The dress is expensive.
S2: Yes. What an expensive
dress !


<i> </i>



<i>Example exchange</i>


S1:The kitchen is amazing


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

<b>2. Further practice .(10ms)</b>
a.Mapped dialogue.


<i>-</i>Set a scene


-Put the mapped dialogue chart on the
board


-Elicit the exchanges from Ss


-Have some pairs practice each exchange
before going on to another exchange.
-After finishing the dialogue,ask a good
pair to demmonstrate the whole dialogue.
*Open pair:


-Ask some pairs to demonstrate the
dialogue.


*Closed pairs:


-Ask Ss to work in pairs, replacing the
information using the tables.


-Monitor and correct.



T asks Ss to use the new greetings
expressions from matching


An Mai
This...house ..beautiful....
And this...bedrom It...nice.


Where...kitchen?
It...over there. Oh !...modern...!
b.write it up


- A 2b P.31


-T controls and corrects.


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in
individual.


- Making sentences for the next
cues.


- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.


-Ss enjoy the game.


- Ss demonstrate the dialogue.
-Ss work in pairs, replacing the
information using the tables.
-Ss use the new greetings


expressions from matching


<b>IV. Consolidation.(3ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to read the model and the concept check.
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
-Asks Ss to give the form of the complement & example:


<b>-</b> What + a/an + adj + Noun !


<b> What a beautiful bathroom ! </b>
<b> an amazing kitchen !</b>
<b>V.Homework.(2ms)</b>


- Study the vocabularies & the model by heart .
-Writing five complement sentences.


-PrepareB1,3


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

:.<i><b>.</b></i>


.
<b> </b>


week: 6


<b>Preparing's day: 18/9/2011</b>


<b>Period:15 Unit 3 : AT HOME</b>




<b>Lesson 4: HOA'S FAMILY <B1,2,3> P.33-35</b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


<b> </b> Helps Ss to read a text about Hoa’s family. By the end of this lesson,
Ss get some main ideas, details & job vocabulary.


I. Knowledge . -Job vocabulary.
<b> II. Skill .</b> -Reading skill


<b>B .Materials : Pictures ; small papers .</b>
<b>C. Ways of working : T – wc ,gw .</b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in listening . T can get them </b>
to predict before listening .


E. Proceduce.


<b> I.Greeting (1m)</b>


<b> II- Revision. T calls ss to write the exclamations</b>
<b> III.New lesson.</b>


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Pre-reading(10ms)</b>


<b>a.Pre teach</b>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.


<b>-</b> (to) raise (cattle):


<b>-</b> (to) take care of
<b>-</b> cattle(n)


<b>-</b> a journalist
<b>-</b> a newspaper


- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
<b>b.Checking vocab.</b>


<b>-</b> 'R.O.R"
<b>c.Matching.</b>


-B3 P.35


*A farmer * writes for a
newspaper



*A doctor * works on a farm
*A journalist * teaches in a school
*A teacher


-Devides the words & the meaning into
two columns & asks Ss to work in
individual to match the meaning to the


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Working in individual to match the
meaning to the words.


<b>*Answer keys:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

words.


-Corrects & comments.
<b>d.T/F statement prediction</b>



<b>1)</b> Hoa's father is a worker.
<b>2)</b> Her mother does the


housework and help on the
farm.


<b>3)</b> Her sister is ten.


<b>4)</b> Lan's father takes care of
sick people


<b>5)</b> Her mother is a doctor.
<b>6)</b> Her brother works on a


farm.


- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to
work in pairs to discuss the answers
- Asks Ss to give the keys & correct.
- Corrects & comments.


<b>2. While-reading.(20ms)</b>


<b>a.T asks Ss to read the text and correct </b>
their prediction.


*Answer key.
1. F
2. T
3. F


4. T
5. F
6. F


<b>b.Comprehension questions.</b>
-B1 P.33-34 qs a)-f)


- Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer the questions.
- Asks Ss to give the answers &
corrects.


* Questions:


a. What does Hoa’s father do ?
b. Where does he work ?
c. What’s her mother job ?
d. What does she do every day?
e. Are they happy ?


f. How old is Hoa’s sister ?


T gives a game "Hangman" To ask ss to
practice.


<b>3. Further practice.(10ms)</b>
<b>-</b> "survey"
<b>Member Age job</b> <b>place of </b>


<b>work</b>


Father


Mother
Brother
Sister


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss
to work in pairs to interview each other
& take note the information about their
family members into the table.


- Asks Ss to report the information
about their family members.


-Ss read quickly and predict which
statements are T or F ?


-Ss read the text and check their
prediction.


- Working in pairs to discuss the
answers.


- Giving the keys .


- Correcting & commenting.


- Working in pairs to answer the
questions.



- Giving the answers & correcting.
* Answers:


a. He’s a farmer.


b. He works on his farm.
c. She is a housewife


d.. Her mother does the housework &
helps on the farm


e. Yes, they are.
f. She is eight.


-Working in pairs to interview each
other & taking note the information
about their family members into the
table.


- Reporting the information about their
family members.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

- Corrects & comments.
-T controls and corrects.
<b> IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to read the model and give again the concept check.
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b> V.Homework.(2ms)</b>



- Study the vocabulary & the comprehension answers.


- Exercise: Write the information about their family members.
- Prepare some information about their parents.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

<b>Preparing's day:19/9/2011</b>


<b>Period:16 Unit 3 : AT HOME</b>



<b>Lesson 5: HOA'S FAMILY <B4> P.35</b>



<b>A .Aim and Objectives .-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to </b>
understand the way to talk about the member in a family and students will be able
to understand the way to use comparalatives and superlatives of irregular


adjectives and long adjectives.
I. Knowledge .


-Personal information
<b> II. Skill</b>


-Listening-reading skills.
<b>B . Materials : Words cue </b>


<b>C . Ways of working : T – wc ;pw .</b>


<b>D .Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in understanding the text . T </b>
can translate it in to VNese .



<b>E. Proceduce.</b>


<b> I.Greeting </b>


<b> II- Revision. Test 15’</b>


<b> * 1 : Choose the correct answer to complete each sentense </b>
<b>1.coffee is a ...</b>


<b>A.meal</b> <b>B.drink</b> <b>C.place</b>


<b>2.VietNam is a...</b>


<b> A.Language B.nationality C.country</b>
<b>3. ...a maring kitchen ! </b>


<b> A.how B.which C.what</b>
<b>4. ... does she get to work</b>


<b> A. what B.what time C.which</b>
<b> * 2: Make a sentence with an exclamation </b>
<b>1. She is very pretty</b>


<b>2. It rains heavily </b>
<b> * Answerkey </b>
<b>* 1: 1.b </b>


<b> 2.c</b>
<b> 3.c</b>
<b> 4.b</b>



<b>*2: 1.what a pretty girl ! </b>
<b> 2.What heavy rain !</b>
<b> III.New lesson.</b>


Teacher's activities Students'activities


<b>1. Pre-listening.(8ms)</b>
<b>a.Pre- teach.</b>


-a high school : trêng cÊp 3
-a magazine: t¹p chÝ


-an apartment : căn hộ
-suitable : phù hợp


-good-better-well : tốt - tèt h¬n - tèt
nhÊt.


-expensive-more expensive-the most
expensive. đắt - đắt hơn - đắt nhất.
- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &


- Listening to the words.



- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb &
checks the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the
words


<b>b.Open prediction.</b>


Name Age Job Place of


work


... ... .... ...


.... ... .... ...


... ... ... ....


- Introduces the example exchange
- Ss to repeat in individual.



-Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


<b>2. While -listening.(10ms ) </b>
<b>a.Listen and check the prediction.</b>
- Introduces the requirement & asks
Ss to work in pairs to do.


- Asks Ss to compare & give their
answers.


- Comments S’s choosing.
-T controls and corrects.


-Ss predict.


- Doing in individual.


-Correcting the pronunciation.
Ss listen and check the prediction.


 Answer key.


Name Age Job Place of work


Tom 26 teacher High school


Susan 19 Journali


st Write for a magazine



Bill 20 nurse Work in a


hospital
-Ss use the grid to talk about Tom, Susan and
Bill.


*Pre-read.(10ms)
1Presentation dialogue.


<b>-</b> B5 P.35-36.
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen


to the text.


- Asks Ss to read the text in
individual.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


2.Comprehension questions.
- B5 a)-d) P.35


-T gives a game "Shark attack" to ask
and answer the qs.


- Introduces the game & expalins the
way to play & devides the class into 2
groups to play the game.



- Hepls Ss to play the game.
- Corrects & comments.
3.Model sentences.


-T set a scene to give the model
sentences.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to
the text.


- Asks Ss to read the text in
individual.


-Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


*The apartment at number 40 is
better. It's more expensive.


*The apartment at number 79 is the
best.It's the most expensive.


Form:S1+(to)be
+more+long-adj+than +S2.


-Ss open their books and read B5 P.35-36.
-Ss listen and take notes.


- Reading the dialogue in individual.


-Correcting the pronunciation.


- Playing the game in 2 groups.
- Commenting the game.


-Ss give the concept check.


-Ss copy down.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

(so sánh hơn)


S+(to)be + the most+long- adj +(o)
(so s¸nh nhÊt)


Use :comparalatives and superlatives
of irregular adjectives and long
adjectives.


<b>*Practice.(10ms)</b>
-Picture drill.


T gives the picture from the
Language focus 1 (5P. 39-40).


- Introduces the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example &
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in



individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the
next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments- T controls and corrects.
*Further practice.(5ms)


-"Written exercise".


T asks Ss to write sentences with
the superlative.


a)Sydney/big/Australia
b)Tokyo/expensive/world
c)he/good/class


d)The titanic/good
e)This food/bad


-T controls and corrects.


-Ss write sentences with the superlative


- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .


-Correcting the pronunciation.


-Ss to write sentences with the superlative.


<b>IV. Consolidation.(1ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to read their writing
<b>V.Homework.(1ms)</b>


-Rewrite about Tom, Susan, and Bill in their notebooks.
-Preparing : Unit 3 : B5,6


Period:17


Preparing date : 25/ 9/ 2011


UNIT 3 : AT HOME
B – Hoa’s Family ( B5,6)
I. Objective


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use


comparatives and superatives of irregular adjectives and long
adjectives . They can use them fluently and apply in the life.
II. Language content:


1. Vocabulary:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

- Advice - Suitable



- Empty - Good=> better => the best
2. Grammar:


Structures: - S1 + tobe + more + adj + than + S2
- S + tobe + the most + adj.


III. Teaching method


Explanation, pairwork, using pictures, communicative.
IV. Teaching aids:


Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures.
V. Procedure:


T’s Activities Ss’ Activities
1. Warm up:


- Greetings.


- Have Ss play a game : Guess the jobs.
+ You go to this person when you have
a toothache.


+ This person writes for a newspaper or
magazine.


+ Before a house is built , this person
draws the plan for it.


+ This person grows vegetables and


raises cattle.


….


- Remark and give marks.
2. New activities:


a) Listen and read:


- Introduce the content of the lesson to
Ss .


- Explain some new words:
+ Apartment (n)= Flat .
+ Advice (n) :


+ Empty (adj) >< Full
+ Furnished ( adj) :
+ Suitable (adj) :


+ Good => better=> the best
Structures:


+ Comparatives of long adjectives
S1 + tobe + more + adj + than + S2
EX: She is more beautiful than her
sister.


+ Superlatives of long adjectives:
S + tobe + the most + adj .



EX: He is the most intelligent.


- Ask Ss to look at the books and listen
to the tape.


- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs.


- Greetings.
- Play a game:
+ Dentist.
+ Journalist
+ Architect
+ Farmer


- Write new lesson.
- Listen.


- Listen and write.


- Guess the meanings .
- Read in chorus and
individually.


- Make sentences.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

- Call on some pairs to read the
dialogue in front of the class.
- Correct their pronunciation.



- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to
find the answers for the questions.
- Have Ss work in pairs.


- Call on some pairs to practice in front
of the class.


- Correct and give the answer key:
a. The one at number 27


b. The one at number 79
c. The one at number 79
d. The one at number 27.


The most suitable apartment is the


smallest but it is the newest of the three
apartments. It has two bedrooms, a
large modern bathroom and a kitchen.
b) Write.


- Introduce the situation of the lesson.
- Ask Ss to read the letter .


- Have Ss use the given words in the
box in order to complete the letter.
- Have Ss exchange the result with the
partner.


- Call on some Ss to read the completed


letter aloud.


- Correct and give the correct answer.
- Ask Ss to copy the letter in the


notebooks.


3. Consolidation.


- Ask Ss to look at the remember and
read .


- Call on some Ss to read aloud.


- Have Ss make sentences with them.
4. Homework:


- Learn by heart new words and


structures by making sentences with
them.


- Do exercises 2,3 at page 16,17 in
workbook.


- Prepare language focus 1.


- Work in pairs.


- Practice asking and


answering.


- Listen and copy.


- Listen.


- Read the letter.
- Complete the letter.


- Exchange the result with
the partner.


- Read the letter aloud.
- Copy the letter in the
notebooks.


- Read .


- Make sentences.
- Write homework.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

Preparing's day:21/9/2011


<b>Period: 18 LANGUAGE FOCUS ( P.38-41 )</b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the
knowledge from unit1 to unit 3.


<b> I.Knowledge.</b>



-The present simple. -The "Will" future -The prepositions
<b> II. Skill</b>


-Reading and speaking drill .
<b>B .Ways of working :T –wc ; pw ; gw </b>
<b>C . Materials : Pictures p 39 ,40 .</b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : It is a long period . So teacher get ss prepare well at </b>
home .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b> I.Greeting </b>
<b> II- Revision. </b>


<b> II. New lesson</b>


<b>TEACHER S WORKS</b>’ <b>STUDENT S WORKS</b>’


<b>1.Present simple tense:(10ms)</b>


- Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to complete the paragraph.


- Asks Ss to compare the keys.
- Asks Ss to give the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
<b>* Keys:</b>


<i><b>a) 1. is; 2. lives ; 3. are; 4. goes.</b></i>



<b>2. Future simple tense: (10ms)</b>


-Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to work
in pairs to write things Nam will do or will not
do tomorrow.


- Asks Ss to compare the keys.
-Asks Ss to practice in pairs.
- Corrects & comments.


<i>He will go to the post office but he won’t call </i>
<i>Ba.</i>


<b>3.Preposition of places: Kim s game:(10ms)</b>’
-Introduces the requirement & Divides Ss into
two groups & helps them to observe the
position of the cat & remember.


-Asks Ss to write the position of the cat in
groups &. Corrects.


* Keys: a./ It’s is under the table.
<i> b./ It’s is in front of the chair</i>


<i> c./ It’s is behind the TV.</i>
<b>4. Occupation: (Time: 5M)</b>


-Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to work
in pairs to write people’s job tittles.



- Asks Ss to compare the keys.
-Asks Ss to give the keys.
- Corrects & comments.


1. She works in a hospital. She makes sick
people well. What’s her job ?


2. She works in a school. She teaches student.
What’s her job ?


3. He lives in the countryside. He grows


Complete the passage, using the verbs
in brackets:


<b>-Working in pairs to complete </b>
the paragraph.


- Comparing the keys & give the keys.
- Correcting the keys.


b) 1. are; 2. eat; 3. rides;
4. catches;




<b>-Working in pairs to Asks Ss to work</b>
in pairs to write things Nam will do or
will not do tomorrow.



- Comparing the keys & give the keys
by practicing in pairs.


- Correcting the keys.


<i>He will see a movie but he won’t watch </i>
<i>TV. He will write to his grandmother but he </i>
<i>won’t meet Minh. </i>


<b>-Observing the position of the cat </b>
& remember.


- Writing the position of the cat in groups
& Corrects.


<i>d./ It’s is next to the shelf.</i>


<i> e./ It’s is on the couch.</i>


<b>*Write people s job tittles:</b>’


<b>-Working in pairs to write people’s</b>
job tittles


-Comparing the keys.
-Giving the keys.
- Correcting the keys.


 <b>Keys:</b><i><b> </b></i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

vegetables. What’s his job ?;


<b>5. Is there a./Are there any.: (Time: 5 M.)</b>
- Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to
work in pairs looking at the picture quickly
then complete the dialogue:


- Asks Ss to practice in pairs & corrects the
mistakes.


- Corrects & comments.


-Working in pairs & looking at the


picture quickly then complete the dialogue
- Practicing in pairs & correcting


the mistakes.
*Answer key:


a) 1. are 2. any ; 3.Yes; 4. are.
b) 1. are 2. any ; 3.No; 4. aren’t.
c) 1. is; 2. a ; 3. No; 4. isn’t.
d) 1. are 2. any ; 3.Yes; 4. are.
IV. Consolidation ( Time: 2M ):


-Ask Ss to explain the way to use the Present simple; The “Will future” &
Preposition.



- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b> V. Homeworks:(Time: 2m)</b>


<b> - Study the grammar & the modal sentence. </b>
- Prepare for the forty five munite test.


...
...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

<b>week: 7</b>


Preparing's day:25/9/2011


<b>Period : 19 WRITTEN TEST 1</b>
<b>Time : 45 minutes.</b>
<b>A . Aims andObjectives </b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the
knowledge from unit1 to unit 3.


<b>I.Knowledge. -The present simple.</b>
-The "Will" future
-The prepositions
<b>II. Skill : -Writting skill</b>


<b>B . Ways of working : indi….</b>
<b>C . Materials : Paper tests .</b>



<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in listening skill . Teacher can</b>
read instead of the radio .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>
<b>II- Revision </b>


<b>I .Listen and write the ordinal numbers you hear .(1.5ms)</b>
a,……… d,………


b,……… e,………
c,………. f,……….
<b>II.Choose the best option. (2,5 M)</b>


1. It's hot in our country...the summer.


a. on b. in c. at d.an


2.I'd like...


a. a glass of orange juice b. a glass orange juice c.a orange juice glass
3.Now, She ...football.


a. will play b.is playing c.plays d.play
4.This armchair is...than that armchair.


a.comfortable b.comfortabler


c.more comfortable d.the more comfortable


5.My house is...than your house.


a.taller b.tall c.more tall d.tallest


6.The Nile river is...river in the world.
a. longer b.longest c.the longest
7.Van will be eighteen...her next birthday.


a.in b.on c.at


8.Lan ...go with us to the zoo next week.


a.will not b.not will c.doesn't will


9.He ...in Ha Noi with his mother, father and elder sister.


a.live b.lives c.living


10.His parents...teachers.


a.am b.is c.are


<b>III.Complete the sentences. Use the words in the box. (1,5 M )</b>
a. lives b. will c. have


d. is e. does f. goes


1.Tomorrow. I ...be at my grandmother's house.
2.My sister...18 years old.



3.My friend...in a small house.
4.Lan and Hoa...lunch at 12:00


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

<b>IV.Write the answer to the questions about yourself. ( 1,5 M )</b>
1.What's your name ?


...
2.How old are you ?


...
3.How far is it from your house to school ?


...
4.What will you do tomorrow morning ?


...
5.How many people are there in your family ?


...
6.Which class are you in ?


...


<b>V.Read the passage and decide if the statements below are true (T) , or false </b>
<b>(F). ( 1,5 M ).</b>


Mai's father is a worker. He works in a factory. Mai's mother is a nurse.
She works in a hospital. She takes care of sick children. Mai has an elder brother.
He is a teacher. He teaches in a primary school.



1.Mai's father is a teacher.
2.Her mother is a nurse.


3.Her brother teaches in a high school.
4.Mai has an elder sister.


5.Mai's family has four people.
6.Her father works in a factory.


VI.Put in the correct tense of verds in brackets. ( 1,5 M ).


1.Mai and Nam always ( play ) football in the afternoon. 1...
2.What will you ( do ) tomorrow morning ? 2...
3.Hoa is in the living - room now. She ( watch ) T.V. 3...
4.He often ( read ) book in the library. 4...
5.They ( not go ) to the zoo. 5...
6.She ( go ) to school every morning. 6...
...
...
...
...
...


<i>******* THE END ********</i>


<b> Preparing day: 26/9/2011</b>


<b>Period : 20 Check the test i</b>


45 minutes.




<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the
knowledge from the text.


<b>I.Knowledge. -The present simple.</b>
-The "Will" future
-The prepositions
<b>II. Skill : -Writting skill</b>


<b>B .Waysof working :T –wc</b>
<b>C .Materials :Paper tests .</b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : There is not any difficulty in this period .</b>
<b>E. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision. Answer key</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

d . twenty-ninth d. eighth e . sixth .


II. Choose the best option to fill in the blank(2.5ms)
1.B 2.A 3.B 4.C .5.A. 6.C.


7.B. 8.A .9.B. 10.C.


III. Complete the sentences .Use the words in the box .( 1.5ms)
1.b .will 2.d.is 3.a.lives 4.c .have 5 .f.goes 6 .e .does



IV . Read the passage and decide the statement below are True ( T ) or False ( F )
1 .F 2 .T 3 . F 4 . F 5 . T 6. T


V. Put the correct tense of the verbs in blankets (1.5ms )


1 .play 2 .do 3 .is watching 4 .reads 5 .do not go 6 .goes .
VI .Write the answer to the question about your sefl .


1 . My name is ………


2 . I am ………..years old .
3 . It is ( about ) ………
4 . I will ……….
5 . There are ………
6 . I am in class ………


<b>IV. Consolidation.</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main grammar in this text.
<b>V.Homework.</b>


-Doing exercise : doing again the text at home.
-Preparing: Unit 4 :A1,2,4


...
...


<i>The end</i>



Preparing day: 26/9/2011


<b>Period: 21 Unit 4 : AT SCHOOL</b>


<b>Lesson 1: SCHEDULES <A1,2,4></b>


<b>A . Aims andObjectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to tell the time,school vocab.
<b> I.Knowledge. -The present simple.</b>


II. Skill . -Reading and speaking drill.
<b>B . Ways of working : T –wc ,ss- ss</b>


<b>C .Materials : Poster , pictures </b>


<b>D . Anticipated prolems : Ss may have difficulty in A4 .T can speak an example</b>
.E. Procedure


<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision.(5ms)</b>
- A1 P.42.


"Noughts and Crosses" 7:00 (1) 4:15 (2) 1:45 (3)
8:30 (4) 9:40 (5) 11:05 (6)
Ex:


S1: What time is it ? 6:35 (7) 5:25 (8) 3:10 (9)
S2: It's seven o'clock.


<b> III. New lesson.</b>



Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Presentation.(10ms)</b>


<b>a.Pre teach.</b>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.
-physics (n) m«n vËt lý


-physical education (n)m«n thĨ dôc
- Introduces the words by explaining


-Ss guess the words and prctice well.
- Listening to the words.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

the meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the prounciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
- Introduces & Asks Ss to read the text.
- Checks S’s reading.



- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments


<b>b.Checking vocab.</b>
-"Slap the board".


math physics


geography music


physical education
<b>2. Practice.(15ms)</b>


-"Picture drill"


<b>-</b> A4 P.43


- Introduces the example exchange &
Hepls Ss to practice.


- Reads the first modal for example &
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in
individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the
next.



- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


T uses the pictures in A4 P.43 to ask Ss
to practice well.


<b>3. Production(10ms)</b>
a.Mapped dialogue


-"slap the boarb": ( Ss listen and slap
the suitable response)


-Put the new words all over the
black-board.


-Call two students or 2 teams of Ss to
the front of the class. Ask them to stand
at an equal distance from the
black-board.


-Teacher calls out of the new words (in
VietNamese) in aloud voice, the two Ss


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.



- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the game.


-Ss open their book in A4 P.43 to look
carefully the pictures to practice well.
<i><b>- Repeating in chorus & in individual.</b></i>
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
-Ss enjoy the game.


<b>Ex:</b>


S1: What is Lan studing?
S2: Lan is studing physics.


S1: What time does Lan have her
physics class?


S2: She has her physics class at 8:40
-Ss listen and slap the suitable
response


-two students or 2 teams of Ss to the
front of the class then ss stand at an
equal distance from the black-board.
-Ss must run forward and slap the word
on the black-board.



-The one who first slaps the correct
word is the winner


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

must run forward and slap the word on
the black-board.


-The one who first slaps the correct
word is the winner. If the Ss play in
team,the winning team gets a mark.
Then ask two more Ss to come
forward,etc...




b."survey"
- A2 P.42


What time/math? 9:30
Literature today? No


When...? On tuesday.


<b>IV. Consolidation.( 3ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.


<b>V.Homework.(2ms)</b>



-Doing exercise : A1,2( workbook) P.35-36
- Study the modal exchange .


-Preparing: Unit 4 : A3,5


...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

<b>week: 8</b>


Preparing’s day: 3/10/2011


<b>Period: 22 Unit 4 : AT SCHOOL</b>



<b>Lesson 2: SCHEDULES <A3,5></b>


<b>A . Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details
and school vocabulary.


<b> I.Knowledge. -The present simple about school vocabulary.</b>
II. Skill . -Listening skill.


<b>B . Ways of working : T -wc , gw , indi …</b>
<b>C . Materials : Picture ,realiars .</b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in listening . T can stop </b>
sentence by another .



<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>
<b>II- Revision.</b>


<b>-"jumpled words"(3ms)</b>


turepics = ? lisheng =? ryhisto =?
grageophy =? sicmu =? tham =
III.New lesson.


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>Pre-listening.(10ms)</b>


<b>a.Pre teach vocab.</b>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.
-Schedule(n) thêi khãa biĨu
-important(adj) quan träng
-fun(adj) hµi híc , vui


- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb &


checks the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the
words.


b.Open prediction.


-T asks Ss to give 5 classes Thu has
on Wednesday and Thursday.


- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to
work in pairs to predict the statements
1.


2.
3.
4.
5.


<b>While-listening(20ms)</b>


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the


pronunciation.



- Copying the words.


-Ss predict 5 classes Thu has on
Wednesday and Thursday.


Expected:
1.Geography


2.Physical education
3.Music


4.English
5.Math


-Ss listen carefully.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

-T turns on the tape
-T checks the predictions.


- Asks Ss to give the keys & correct.


Comprehension questions.


-T gives 5 qs in book, and give a
game to practice "Hangman".


.A3 P.43


-nb: Use" physics" instead "Science".
Post-listening.(7ms)



-T asks Ss to write their schedule in
your exercise book.


1.English
2.Math
3.Geography


4.Physical education
5.Music


-Ss enjoy the game.
*Answer key.
On Wed. and thu.


On Wed. at 8:40,On Thu. at 9:40.
Math,Geography,Physical


education,and Physics.


History.It's an interesting and
important.


Math. It's difficult but fun.


-Ss listen and fill the gaps with time
and subjects.


-Ss ask and answer qs about their
schedule with your partner.



IV. Consolidation.(1ms)


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework.(2ms)


-Doing exercise : A3,4(workbook)


- Study the vocabulary & the comprehension answers.
-Preparing: Unit 4 :A6


...
...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

Preparing’s day: 3/10/2011


<b>Period: 23 Unit 4 : AT SCHOOL</b>


<b>Lesson 3: SCHEDULES <A6></b>


<b>A . Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details
and compare an American school with a VietNamese school.


<b>I.Knowledge. -The present simple about school vocabulary.</b>
II. Skill . -Reading skill.



<b>B . Ways of working : T-wc ; ss-ss ;gw . </b>
<b>C . Materials : Pictures .</b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : </b>


Ss may have difficulty in reading . T can read and ss repeat .
<b>E. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting </b>
<b>II- Revision.</b>


-"Hangman"(3ms)


____---(schedule)
---(school)


---(class)
III.New lesson.


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>Pre-reading.(10ms)</b>


<i>a.Pre teach vocab.</i>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.
-uniform (n) : đồng phục


-a break : nghỉ giải lao (giữa giờ)
-a cafeteria : quán ăn tự phục vụ
-a snack : món ăn nhẹ/ món ăn nhanh


-(to) sell : bán


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.


<i>b.Checking vocab</i>.
"R.O.R"


c.T/F prediction
-A6 P.45


- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in
pairs to predict the statements


- Asks Ss to give the keys & correct.
*True / False statement:


a./ Ss don’t usually wear school uniform.
b./ There’re classes un Saturday morning.


c./ Ss don’t have break in the afternoon.


d./ The school cafeteria sells food to Ss help of
modern equipment.


e./ The school cafeteria only open at lunchtime.
f./ Basket ball is an unpopular after school
activity.


<b>While-reading.(20ms)</b>


-Ss guess the words and
practice.


- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in
chorus & in individual.
Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the game.


-Ss open their book and read
A6 P.45 carefully.


-Ss check their predictions
- Working in pairs to predict


the statements


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

a. read the text and check the predictions.
-T asks Ss to open their book A6 P.45 to read
carefully.


- Introduces & ask Ss to read the text in
silence.


- Asks Ss to check their prediction.


-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
b."Grid" with answer key.


-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
pairs to the text & find out the information &
fill in the table.


-Asks Ss to report the information.
- Corrects & comments


Activities In the USA In Viet Nam
There is


school
uniform.


x v


Classes start... 8:30 7:00


The school


day ends at... 3:30 or 4:00 11:00
There are


lesson on
Sartuday


x v


Students have
lunch at
school


v x


<b>Post-reading.(7ms)</b>
-"Transformation writing"
A6 P.45


-Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work
in pairs to write about their school. Basing on
the text.


-Asks Ss to give their information.
- Corrects & comments.


silence.


-Checking the prediction.


- Correcting the


pronunciation


- Giving the keys &
Correcting


* Answer keys:


a: T; b: F; c: F; d: T; e:
T; f: T.


-Ss practice well.


- Working in pairs to work
in pairs to the text & find
out the information & fill in
the table.


-Reporting the information.


-Ss write about their
schools.


- Working in pairs to write
about their school. Basing
on the text.


-Giving the information.
-Correcting the information.


<b>Ex: There is usually </b>


<b>school uniform in my </b>
<b>school. Our classes start </b>
<b>at...</b>




<b>IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>



-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.



- Ask Ss to compare the differences between an American school with a


Vietnamese school.



- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>V.Homework.(3ms)</b>



- Study the vocabulary.


-Writing about your school.



- Prepare the picture on page 47& some information about the school


library.



-Preparing: Unit 4 :B1



...


...


...


...



...



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

Preparing’s day: 5/10/2010


<b>Period: 24 Unit 4 : AT SCHOOL</b>


<b>Lesson 4: THE LIBRARY <B1></b>


<b>A . Aims andObjectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details
and practise Library vocabulary.


<b> I.Knowledge. -The present simple about library vocabulary.</b>
II. Skill . -Reading skill.


<b>B . Ways of working : T- wc ; pw ; gw ; indi ..</b>
<b>C . Materials : Picture of a library .</b>


<b>D .Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in listening . T can play the </b>
tape sentence by another .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting</b>


<b>II- Revision.(5ms) </b>
-"Slap the board"


literature history physics
geography biology


III. New lesson.



Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Pre-reading.(10ms)</b>


<b>a.Pre teach vocab.</b>


T elicits to teach vocabulary.
-a library: th viện( relia)
-a novel : tiểu thuyết
-a reader: sách đọc thêm
-a dictionary: từ in


-a reference book :sách tham khảo


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal, then helps Ss
to repeat


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b> b.Checking vocab. "Wordsquare"</b>


-Introduces the wordsquares & helps Ss to find


out the 11 hidden vocabulary about classes &
Corrects & comments.<i> </i>


-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to answer&
Comments the answer.


N E W S P A P E R S


I N O C N O V E L S


N F L I R S T L S L


E L L E A K H E R I


H E O N C O G V E B


T H F C K O I E D R


A S O E S B R N A A


M A G A Z I N E E R


D I C T I O N A R Y


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in
chorus & in individual.
Correcting the mistakes.



- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss find 11 hidden words about
classes.




Newspaper,novels,magazine,
dictionary.




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

<b>b.Pre-questions.</b>


-When is the library open ?


-What kind of book are there in the library ?
<b> 2. While -reading.(20ms)</b>


<b>a.Comprehension question:</b>


<b> -Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in </b>
pairs to answer. Then give the keys.


-Corrects & comments.


 Questions:



1./ Where’re the magazines ?
2./ Where’re the newspaper ?
3./ What books are on the left ?
4./ What books are on the left ?
5./ Where’re the books in English ?
6./ What time does the library open ?
7./ What time does the library close ?
b."Grid" with answer key,then Comprehension
qs: B1 a)-g) P.47-48.


-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to read the
text in silence & work in pairs to find out the
information & fill in the table.


-Asks Ss to report the information.
- Corrects & comments.


The library
opening time 7 a.m


Books on the


left Math,science books


Books on the


right History,geography,dictionaryand literature in Viet Nam.
Books in



English Readers novels,reference books and dictionaries
Closing time 4:30 p.m


<b>3.Post-reading(7ms)</b>
-"Written exercise"


-Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work
in pairs to write about their school library.
-Asks Ss to give their information.


- Corrects & comments.


*Answer:


- It’s open at 7.30.


- There’re references books &
novels…


<b>-Working in pairs to answer. </b>
Then giving the keys.


 Answer:


1./ They’re on the racks .
2./ They’re on the racks .
3./ Math & science books
4./ History & geography
books.



5./ At the back of the library.
6./ It opens at 7.00 a.m
7./ It closes at 4.30 p.m.


- Working in pairs to work in
pairs to the text & find out the
information & fill in the table.
-Reporting the information.
-Ss read 2 questions and
predict the answer.


-Ss read B1 and practice well.


<b>- Working in pairs to write</b>
about their school library .
-Giving the information.
-Correcting the information.
<b> IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
- Ask Ss to describe the library in the text.


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b> V.Homework.(1ms)</b>


- Study the vocabulary.


-Writing about your school library.


- Prepare the picture on page 48& some information about the school library


-Preparing: Unit 4: B2-3.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

<i>THE END</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

<b>week: 9</b>


Preparing day: 10/10/2011


<b>Period: 25 Unit 4 : AT SCHOOL</b>



<b>Lesson 5: THE LIBRARY <B 2-3-4></b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to describe the position of
book in the library.


<b>I.Knowledge. -Prepositons of position "at the back/front, on the </b>
left/right,in the middle"


II. Skill . -Reading and listening skill.
<b>B . Ways of working : Gw , indi ...</b>


<b>C . Materials : Pictures .</b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in compare the libray of </b>
Congress with their own . T can review the form of comparation .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>
<b>II- Revision.</b>


III. New lesson.


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Presentation. (10ms)</b>


<b>a.Pre teach</b>


-a rack (n) giá đỡ -picture
-in the middle :(prep.) ở giữa
-(to) find : tìm kiếm


-at the back :(prep.) phÝa sau
-at the front :(prep.) phÝa tríc
-(to) receive : nhËn


-(to) contain: chứa đựng
-employee :(n) công nhân


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal, then helps Ss
to repeat


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.



- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>b.Checking vocab.</b>


-"R.O.R"


<b>c.Presentation dialogue.</b>


-T asks Ss to look at the dialogue B2 P.48
-T elicits to give the model sentences.
S1:where can I find the math


are


books,please? racks


S2:They are on the shelf on the left.
<b>c.T/F prediction</b>


-B4 P.49


1) The library in Conggress is in
NewYork.


2) It receives copies of all English books.
3) There are over 100 million books in


this library.


4) The shelves are about in the library.
5) 5.000 people work in the library.



<b>d.Checking prediction.</b>


- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in
chorus & in individual.
Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the game.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

-T asks Ss to read the text and check their
prediction.


*Answer key.


1F 2.F 3.T 4.F 5.T


b.Lcucky numbers. ( question a)-f) B4 P.49).
1.d 2.ln 3.e 4.b 5.ln 6.a 7.c


*Answer key.


a.It's in Washington DC, the capital of the USA.
b.It's has over 100 million books.


c.It's has about 1.000km of shelves.


d.Over 5.000 people work there.


e.Because it recieves copies of all American
books.


<b>2. Practice.(13ms)</b>
-B1 P.47


T gives a game "noughts and crosses".


Science books reference book newspaper
magazine readers biology
books


novels history books dictionaries
Ex:


S1: Where are the science books ?
S2: They are on the shelves on the right.


<b>3. Pre-listening(5ms)</b>
-"open prediction'


T asks Ss to guess What books are on the racks
and shelves. (2, 3,4 + 5,6 +7 )


-Introduces the picture & asks Ss to guess what
books are on the racks & the shelves.


-Asks Ss to give their prediction.


-Comments.


<b>4. While-listening.(10ms)</b>
-"Grid"


No Guess Listen


1 Study center


2
3
4+5
6+7


8 Library's desk


-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to listen to the
text & work in pairs to find out the information
& fill in the table.


-Asks Ss to compare & report the information.
-Corrects & comments.


<b>5. Post-listening.(5ms)</b>
-"Write it up"


-Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work
in pairs to write about the position of the books
in the library, using the grid.



-Asks Ss to give their information.
- Corrects & comments.


-Ss look at the picture P.48
and guess What books are on
the racks and shelves.


-Ss listen and fill in the Grid.
Then compare with their
prediction.


-Ss write sentences about the
position of books in the
library, using the Grid.


-Guessing what books are on
the racks & the shelves.
- Giving their prediction.


- Working in pairs to work in
pairs to listen to the text &
find out the information & fill
in the table.


-Comparing & Reporting the
information.


*Answer key.
2: Science math
3: Geography



4+5: Newspaper and
magazines.


6+7: English


<b>- Working in pairs to write</b>
about the position of the
books in the library, using the
grid.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

<b>IV. Consolidation.(1m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


-Doing exercise : B4,5 (workbook)
-Preparing: Unit 5: A1-3


...
...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

Preparing day:11/10/2011


<b>Period: 26 Unit 5 : WORK AND PLAY</b>


<b>Lesson 1: IN CLASS <A1,3></b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about school
subjects.


<b>I.Knowledge. - Simple present tense</b>
<b>II. Skill . -Reading and speaking drill.</b>
<b>B . Ways of working : Gw , pw , </b>


<b>C . Material : vcd , radio , pictures .</b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in practice asking and </b>
answering . T may do an example .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>
<b>II- Revision.</b>
III. New lesson.


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Presentation.(10ms)</b>


a.Pre teach.


-(to) interested in:thay vì
-a map :bản đồ -picture


-an experiment: thÝ nghiÖm- picture
-last - last lesson : tiÕt häc cuèi- example


- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning,


using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal, then helps Ss to
repeat


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Check vocab.


-"What and Where"


c.Presentation text.A1 P.51


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text.
- Introduces the content of the text.
- Checks S’s reading.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>2. Practice.(20ms)</b>


<b>a.Grid with answer key.</b>


-Asks Ss to read the text to get the details & fill in
the table in individual.



-Asks Ss to compare the information.
-Asks Ss to give the information.
- Corrects & comments.


Classes What to do


Computer


science to learn how to use a coputer
Geography to study maps and learn how


about different countries.
Physics to do some experiments
b.Word cue drill.


-T asks Ss to depend on th Grid to make qs and
answer about What Mai does in her class.


- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in
chorus & in individual.
Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.
-Ss enjoy the game.


_Ss open their book to raed
the text.



-Correcting the


pronunciation.


<b>- </b> Correcting the


pronunciation.


-Filling in the table in
individual & correcting.


-Comparing the


information.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to
practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to
repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


Using the grids to make


questions & answers about
what Mai does in her class.


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in
individual.


- Making sentences for the
next cues.


- Practicing in groups & in
pairs .


-Correcting the


pronunciation.


<i><b>Example exchange:</b></i>


S1: What does Mai do in
her Science class?


S2: She learns how to use a
computer.


<b> IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.


-Ask Ss to give the simple present question & answer to talk about school
subjects .



S1: What does Mai do in her Science class ?
S2: She learns how to use a computer.


-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b> V.Homework.(1m)- Study the vocabulary & the exchange.</b>
-Writing about your classes .-Preparing new lesson: Unit5:A2


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

Preparing day:11/10/2011


<b>Period: 27 Unit 5 : WORK AND PLAY</b>


<b>Lesson 2: IN CLASS <A2></b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about school subjects.
<b>I.Knowledge. - Simple present tense</b>


<b>II. Skill . -Reading and speaking drill.</b>
<b>B . Ways of working : T – wc , gw , indi….</b>
<b>C . Materials : Picture page 52 </b>


<b>D. Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in understanding the questions</b>
. T can explain the meaning .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision./Warm-up.(5ms)</b>
-“Kim’s game”



-refrigerator; tivi; washing machine; shower; dryer; guitar.
III. New lesson.


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1.Pre-reading.(10ms)</b>


<b>a. Lead-in:</b>


-What’s your favorite subject?
-Why?


-What do you do in your free time?
b.Pre teach.


-(to) repair: sửa chữa
-drawing(n) tranh v
-electronics :điện
-appliance(n) thiết bị


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal, then helps Ss
to repeat


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the


meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Check vocab.


-"Jumpled word"


c.T/F statements prediction


<b>1)</b> Ba enjoys his school very much.
<b>2)</b> His favorite subject is electronics.
<b>3)</b> He is not good at fixing things.


<b>4)</b> He can help his parents on their farm.
<b>5)</b> He never goes to art club.


<b>2.While-reading.(20ms)</b>
a.Check prediction:


T asks ss to read the text and check their
prediction.


<i><b>Guess the meaning.</b></i>


. a household appliance bức hoạ
. the guitar đàn ghi ta
. an artist thiết bị gia
đình


<b>b.Comprehension questions.</b>


“Lucky number”


Ss answer:
Expected:


-I like math. Because it’s
important subject.


-I often listen to music.


- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in
chorus & in individual.
Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the game.


Ss resd the text and and check
their prediction.


-Ss find the mistakes to
correct the sentences.
Answer key:


1.T 2.T 3.F 4.F 5.F



-Working in group to answer
the questions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

a.Which subject does Balike best?


b.Does Ba like the other subjects at school?
c.What does he learn to do in Electronics? Write
the sentence that tells you this.


d.How does this subject to help Ba?


e.Is Ba good at drawing? Write the sentence that
tells you this.


<b>3. Post-reading(7ms)</b>
-"Discussion)"


1.What do you do in your free time?
2.What are you good at?


3.What is your favorite subject ?


-T asks ss to work in 4 groups to answer the
questions.


-Corrects & comments.


a.He likes Electronics best.
b.Yes, he does. He enjoys


school very much.


c.He learn to repair house
appliances.


d.He will able to fix his our
appliances.


e.Yes, he is. His drawings are
very good.


-Ss work in 4 groups to discus
-Group1 ask <=> group 2
answer


-Take note.


<b> IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.


-Ask Ss to give the simple present question & answer to talk about school
subjects


S1: What does Mai do in her Science ?
S2: She learns how to use a computer.
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b> V.Homework.(1m)</b>



- Study the vocabulary & the exchange.
-Writing about your classes .


-Preparing new lesson: unit 5: A4-6


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

<b>week: 10</b>


Preparing day: 17/10/2011


<b>Period: 28 Unit 5 : WORK AND PLAY</b>


<b> Lesson 3: IN CLASS <A4-6></b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able topracitce well some
school subject vocab. with listening and reading.


<b>I.Knowledge. - School vocabulary.</b>
<b>II. Skill . -Reading and listening skill . </b>
<b>B . Materials : Picture page 54 , vcd , radio . </b>
<b>C . Ways of working :T – wc , gw , indi …</b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in listening . T can get ss to </b>
predict and play vcd sentence by another .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting</b>
<b>II- Revision. </b>
-"Matching"( 3ms)
A4 P.54.



*T match the picyure with the subjects:computer science, physical
education, geography, electronics, class activities.


<b>III. New lesson.</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>1. Pre-listening.(5ms)</b>


" Open prediction'


-Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work
in pairs & predict what subjects Ba / Hoa has
on Saturday morning & write the name Ba /
Hoa next to the picture.


-Asks Ss to give their prediction.


? What subjects Ba/Hoa has on Sarturday
morning.


?....etc.


<b>2. while-listening.(9ms)</b>


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text to
get the information bout the subjects that Ba &
Hoa has on Saturday morning.


- Asks Ss to compare their information.



- Helps Ss to listen to the text & check their
prediction.


- Checks S’s prediction.
- Corrects & comments
-T turns on the tape.


<b>3. Pre-reading(10ms)</b>
<b>a.Pre teach</b>


-an essay: bài văn -relia
-an event : sù kiƯn


-calculator : (n) c¸i m¸y tÝnh


-past and present events: những sự kiện trong
quá khứ và hiƯn t¹i


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal, then helps Ss


-Working in pairs & predict
what subjects Ba / Hoa has on
Saturday morning & write the
name Ba / Hoa next to the
picture.


-Giving the prediction.



<b>-Ss predict What Ba/Hoa has </b>
on Sarturday morning.


_Ss wute the name(Ba/Hoa)
next to the picture


-Ss listen and check their
prediction.


- Listening to the text to get
the information bout the
subjects that Ba & Hoa has on
Saturday morning.


- Comparing their information.
- Listening to the text &
checking the prediction.
<b>Answer keys:</b>


<i><b> Ba: d; a; e.</b></i>
<i><b> Hoa: c; b; e</b></i>


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in
chorus & in individual.
Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the


pronunciation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

to repeat


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Ckeck vocab.


-R.O.R
c.Matching.


<b>-</b> A6 P.55


-Introduces the vocabularies & the meaning
then asks Ss to work in individual to match. the
subjects to the correct items.


-Corrects & Comments.


nb:New words are taught passively: piano;
graph; globe; atlas; (to0 paint; .


d.Openprediction.


<b>4.While-reading.A5 P.55(5ms)</b>



- Introduces & asks Ss to read the text to get the
details & check their prediction.


- Asks Ss to compare their information.


- Helps Ss to listen to the text & check their
prediction.


- Corrects & comments


<b>5.Comprehension questions.(5ms)</b>


a) What do you study at school?
b) What do you learn in Literature?
c) Do you study past and present


event in History?


d) What subject do you learb about
different countries and their
people?


e) Do you speak in Language class?
f) What other things do you study?


<b>6.Post-reading.(5ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "Noughts and Crosses"
History language Art


Physics Computer science Math
Literature Electronics Geography


-Ss do well.


-Ss predict the subjects that
will appear in the text.


- Working in individual to
match. the subjects to the
correct items.


- Reading the text to get the
details & checking their
prediction.


- Comparing their information.
- Checking the prediction.
*Answer key.


-literature, history, geography,
physics,


language class, music,
sports,art.


-Working in pairs to answer.
Then giving the keys.


<i><b>Answer:</b></i>



1./ Computer science ,
Physical education,


Geography, Electronics, Class
activities.


2./ Yes, I do.
3./ Geography.
4 Yes, I do.


5./ We learn about books &
write essays..


-Ss enjoy the game.
Ex:


S1:What do you do in History?
S2: We study past and present
events.


<b> IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b> V.Homework.(1ms)</b>


- Study the vocabulary content of the text .
- Prepare the school activities.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

...


...
...
...
...


...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

Preparing day: 17/10/2011


<b>Period: 29 Unit 5 : WORK AND PLAY</b>



<b>Lesson 4: IT'S TIME FOR RECESS <B1></b>


<b>A . Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the main
and details ideas of the text..


<b>I.Knowledge. - Present progressive tense.</b>
- Recess activities vocab.
<b>II. Skill . -Reading and speaking drill.</b>
<b>B . Materials : picture p 56 , vcd , radio . </b>


<b>C . Ways of working : gw , pw , indi …</b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in listening B2 . T can play </b>
sentence by another .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision. (5ms)</b>
-"Noughts and Crosses"


-Ss listen to the name of the subject and tell what we study(learn) in this subject.
Teacher's note:


a. music f.geography a b c
b. math g.history


c. literature h.electronics d e f
d. English i.computer science


e. physics g h i
Ex:


S1: "a"
T: Music


S1: In this subject we learn to sing a song.
III. New lesson.


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Presentation.(15ms)</b>


a.Pre teach


-(to) talk about: nói về/ kể về
-(to) chat: tán gẫu



-(to) play catch:
marbles


blind man's bluff
-(to) skip rope: nhảy dây


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal, then helps
Ss to repeat


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Checking vocab.


<b>-</b> What and Where
c.Presentation text.


<b>-</b> B1. P.56


Recess activities The most popular
activities



-meeting friends
...


...


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus &
in individual. Correcting the
mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the game.


<b>-Ss listen and read the text to </b>
complete the list.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

-skipping rope


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text to
get the information bout the school recess.
- Asks Ss to complete the list.


- Asks Ss to compare their information.
- Corrects & comments



<b>2. Practice(15ms)</b>
-" Picture cue drill"
- B1 P.56 a)-f)


- Introduces the example exchange & the
picture then helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>3. Further practice(7ms)</b>


-"Write it up"


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in individual to write about what the
Ss in the picture on page 56 are doing, using
the present progressive tense..


- Asks Ss to give their information.
- Corrects & comments.


Ex: (a) The boys are talking to each other.
...etc.



information bout the school
recess..


- Completing the list.


-Comparing their information.
* Answer keys:


Recess


activities The most popular
Meeting


friends
Talking
Eating
Drinking
Chatting
Playing
catch..
Skipping


- Talking


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in
individual.


- Making sentences for the next
cues.



- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Example exchange:


<b> S1: </b><i>What is the boy doing ?</i>
<i> S2: He is reading.. </i>


- Working in individual to write
about what the Ss in the picture on
page 56 are doing using the
present progressive tense.


- Giving the information.
<b>* Example sentence:</b>


The boys are talking to each other


<b> IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
- Ask Ss to describe the school recess activities.




<b> V.Homework.(1ms)</b>
- Study the vocabulary.


-Writing about your school recess activities.
- Prepare the picture on page 57.



-Preparing: Unit 5: B3


...
...
...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

Preparing day: 18/10/201


<b>Period: 30 Unit 5 : WORK AND PLAY</b>



<b>Lesson 5: IT'S TIME FOR RECESS <B2-4></b>


<b>A . Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the main
and details ideas of the text..


<b>I.Knowledge. Recess in American school.</b>
<b>II. Skill . -Reading skill.</b>


<b>B . Ways of working : T –wc , pw , indi… </b>
<b>C . Materials : Picture p 57 , survey page 58 . </b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in newwords . T can get ss to </b>
match .


<b>B. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>



<b>II- Revision. (3ms)</b>
-"Bingo"


Ss write 5 activities at recess.


T read: play catch/playmarbles/play blind man's bluff/skip rope/chat/talk
to friend/meet friends/eat/listen to music/drink/play baseball/read.


III. New lesson.


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Presentation. (15ms)</b>


a.Pre teach


-junior school: trờng cấp 1 ( tiểu học)
-junior high school: trờng cấp 2 (THCS)
-senior high school: trờng cấp 3 (THPT)
-(to) score a goal: ghi một bàn thắng
-(to)swap : trao đổi


-(to) relax: nghØ ng¬i/ th gi·n
-(to) take part in : tham gia vµo


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal, then helps Ss
to repeat



- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation & Corrects


b.Checking vocab.


<b>-</b> R.O.R
b.Pre-reading.


-"Prediction"
T gives a question


? What do Ss in American school do at recess?
-Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work
in pairs & predict .


-Comments S’s prediction.
<b>2. While-reading.(17ms)</b>
<b>a.Check prediction.</b>


*Answer key.


-Skip rope/talking about...
<b>b.Matching.</b>


-Introduces the vocabularies & the meaning
then asks Ss to work in individual to match.


the subjects to the correct items.


-Corrects & Comments.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus
& in individual. Correcting the
mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.
-Ss enjoy the game.


-Ss listen the question and
predict the answer.


-Ss open their book to read B1a
carefully to check their


prediction.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

-energetic students kh¾p thÕ giíi
-portable CD players b¹n qua th
-pen pal chñ yÕu


-mainly những gói kẹo
-world wide những học sinh năng


động


- packets of candy máy nghe nhạc CD xách
tay


<b>c.Multiple choice. (a,b,c,d)</b>
-P.18


-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in
individual to choose the best answer to fill in
the gaps.


- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys.
-Corrects & Comments.


<b>3. Post-reading.(7ms)</b>
-"Discusion"


-? What is the most popular recess activity in
your school?


-Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work
in groups to discuss about what they often do
at recess & what is the most popular recess
activities in their school


- Asks Ss to report the information.
-Comments.


-T controls and corrects



match. the subjects to the
correct items.


- Working in individual to
choose the best answer to fill in
the gaps.


- Comparing & giving the keys.
<b>* Answer key:</b>


a./ C - an American school.
b./ A – short.


c./ D – mostly boys


d. d.D – world wide-Ss doing
well.


- Working in groups to discuss
about what they often do at
recess & what is the most
popular recess activities in their
school


- Reporting the information.
-Take notes


<b>IV. Consolidation.</b>



-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework.</b>


- Study the vocabulary content of the text .
- Prepare part B1b – B2 – B4..


-Preparing: Unit 6: A1-2


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

<b>WEEK: 11</b>


Preparing day: 24 /10/2011


<b>Period: 31 Unit 6 : AFTER SCHOOL</b>



<b>Lesson 1: WHAT DO YOU DO? <A1-2></b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about after school
activities.


<b>I.Knowledge. -Simple present with adverbs of frequency.</b>
<b>II. Skill . -Reading and speaking drill.</b>


<b>B . Ways of working : T –wc , pw . </b>
<b>C . Materials : vcd , picture p 60 . </b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in reading . T can ead first </b>
and get ss to repeat .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision. (3ms)</b>
-"Matching"


Students match the words with the pictures(A2 P.60)
<b>III. New lesson.</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>1. Presentation. (15ms)</b>


a.Pre teach.


-(to) do homework: lµm bµi tËp


-(to) study in the library: häc/ nghiªn
cøu ë th viƯn


-(to) meet friends: gặp gỡ bạn bè
-(to) play the guitar: luyện/ chơi đàn
ghi ta.


- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &


corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Checking vocab.


<b>-</b> "Slap the board"
-T sets a scene-"slap the boarb": ( Ss
listen and slap the suitable response)
-Put the new words all over the
black-board.


-Call two students or 2 teams of Ss to
the front of the class. Ask them to stand
at an equal distance from the
black-board.


-Teacher calls out of the new words (in
VietNamese) in aloud voice, the two Ss
must run forward and slap the word on
the black-board.


-The one who first slaps the correct
word is the winner. If the Ss play in
team,the winning team gets a mark.
Then ask two more Ss to come


- Listening to the words.



- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the game.


- putting the words in the box in the
columns that are true about you.


- Reading the dialogue in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

forward,etc...


c.Presentation dialogue.
<b>-</b> A1 P.60


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
text.


- Asks Ss to read the text in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


d.Comprehension quetions
<b>-</b> A1 P.61 a)-f)


<b>-</b> "Hangman"


-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer. Then give the
keys.


-Corrects & comments.


<b>2. Practice.(14ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "Picture drill"
-A2a P.61


- Introduces the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example &
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in
individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the
next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs .


-Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


<b>3. Production. (10ms)</b>


T gives a question:


? What after school activities do you
often do?


T gives some cue words.


-meet the friends. -do homework
-listen to music -go swimming
-watch T.V -play the guitar
-study in the library -play volleyball
-help mother with the hosework.


I often do I always


do I never do


-T controls and corrects.


<i><b>S1: What do you usually do after</b></i>
<i><b>school ?</b></i>


<i><b>S2: I usually meet my friends.</b></i>


-Working in pairs to answer. Then
giving the keys.


 Answer:


1. Hoa is doing her Math homeworks.


2. they are going to have a cold drink.
3. Ba is in the music room.


4./ He’s learning to pay the guitar.
5./ Minh usually meet his friends 7 do
his homeworks.


6./ Hoa enjoys playing volley ball.
<b>*Example exchange: </b>


<i><b>S1: What do you usually do after</b></i>
<i><b>school ?</b></i>


<i><b>S2: I usually meet my friends.</b></i>


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.


- Working in pairs to answer the
question “What after school activities
do you often do ?” & put the given
words into the box in the column that
are true about them.


- Comparing & giving the information.


<b> IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>



-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

<b> V.Homework.(1ms)</b>


- Study the vocabularies & the model by heart .


-Writing a short paragraph to talk about your after school activities..


- Prepare the vocabulary & the picture on part 2 / page 62 for lesson 2.
...
...
...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

Preparing day: 24/10/201


<b>Period: 32 Unit 6 : AFTER SCHOOL</b>



<b>Lesson2: WHAT DO YOU DO? <A3></b>


<b>A . Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details
about after school activities.


<b>I.Knowledge. -Simple present with adverbs of frequency.</b>
<b>III. Skill . -Reading skill</b>



<b>B . Ways of working : T – wc ,pw . </b>
<b>C . Materials : Picture p 61 </b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in practicing . T can do an </b>
example .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision. (3ms) </b>
-"Kim's game"
(using pictures P.61)
III. New lesson.


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Pre-reading (15ms)</b>


a.Pre teach.


-(to rehearse :diƠn tËp( rehearse a play : tËp 1 vë
kÞch )


-(to) collect stamps : su tÇm tem


-School anniversary celebration : lƠ kØ niƯm
trêng


-comic (n ) truyÖn tranh
-pastime ( n ) trò tiêu khiển



- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Check vocab.


- R.O.R


c.T/F statements prediction.


a)Nga is not a member at a school theater club.
b)Ba is the present of the stamp collector's club.
c)Ba's American friend give him a lot of


VietNamese stamps.


d)Ba always watches videos in the afternoon.
<b>2. While-reading .(20ms)</b>


a.T asks Ss to read the text and check their
prediction.



*Answer key.


a) T c ) F
b) T d ) F
b.Wh-quetions.


<b>a)</b> Do Ss of class 7A enjoy the same
activities after school?


<b>b)</b> What's Nga favorite pastime?


-Ss guess the meaning,
pronunciation, and practice
the words well.


- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in
chorus & in individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.
-Ss enjoy the game.


-Ss read the sentences and
predict which sentsnces are
T/F?



(Ss close their books)


-Ss read the text and check
their prediction.


- Giving the keys .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

<b>c)</b> What's Nga theater group doing?
<b>d)</b> What do Ba and his friends do if


they have any new stamps?


<b>e)</b> When does the stamps collector's
club meet?


<b>f)</b> What does Nam do in the
afternoon?


<b>g)</b> How often does Nam read a library
book or comics?


<b>h)</b> How often does Nam play game?
<b>i)</b> How often do you play video


games?


-T gives a game"Noughts and Crosses" to ask Ss
to practice.



<b>4. Post-reading.(5ms)</b>
_ "disscusion"


T gives a question:"What do you usually do
after school?"


-Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work
in groups to discuss the question: “<i><b>What do you</b></i>
<i><b>usually do after school ?</b></i>”


- Asks Ss to report the information.
-Comments.


-Ss play a game"Noughts and
Crosses" well.


- Working in groups to
discuss the question: “<i><b>What</b></i>
<i><b>do you usually do after</b></i>
<i><b>school ?</b></i>”


- Reporting the information
-Ss read the topic then work
in groups.( 4 groups)


<b> IV. Consolidation.(1m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.


<b> V.Homework.(1m)-Learning by heart all vocabulary</b>


-Preparing: Unit 6:A4


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

Preparing day: 25/10/2011


<b>Period: 33 Unit 6 : AFTER SCHOOL</b>


<b>Lesson 3: WHAT DO YOU DO? <A4></b>


<b>A . Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details
about after school activities.


<b>I.Knowledge. - After school activities.</b>
<b>II. Skill . -Listening skill.</b>


<b>B . Ways of working : T –wc , pw .</b>
<b>C . Materials : Picture p 62 , vcd , radio . </b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in pronouncing the new </b>
words . T can get ss to repeat .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting "sing a song"</b>


- go to the movie


<b>II- Revision.(3ms)</b>
-"Brainstorming"


After school activities. ...


<b>III. New lesson.</b>


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Pre-listening.(15ms)</b>


a.Pre teach.


-(to) tidy the classroom : dän phßng


-(to) go to the concert : đi đến buổi hòa nhạc
-(to) practice English : thực hành tiếng Anh
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal, then helps Ss to
repeat


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation & Corrects


b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> What and Where
c.Open prediction.


-T asks Ss to predict activities pupils in the
dialogue do after school.



-Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in
pairs & predict activities pupils in the dialogue
do after school.


- Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction .
- Comments S’s prediction.


<b>2. While-listening.(15ms)</b>
-T turns on the tape.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text to
get the information bout activities pupils in the
dialogue do after school


- Asks Ss to compare their information.


- Helps Ss to listen to the text & check their
prediction.


- Checks S’s prediction.
- Corrects & comments


<b>3. Post-listening.(10ms)</b>
<b>-</b> "Mapped dialogue"


-Ss guess the meaning,
pronunciation, and practice
the words well.



- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in
chorus & in individual.
Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.
-Ss enjoy the game.


-Ss predict activities pupils
do do after school.


(Ss close their books)


-Ss listen to the tape and
check their predictions.
*<i><b>Answer key.</b></i>


<b>a)</b> Mai-go to the school
cafeteria


<b>b)</b> Nam-rehearse the play
<b>c)</b> Ba-go to the cicus
<b>d)</b> Lan-watch movie
<b>e)</b> Kien-tidy the class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

Should/go/concert? ....a great idea
What/you/Nam? ...have



to/homework


How/you/Hoa? ...love/let's/go
- Introduces the mapped dialogue.


- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue.


- Asks Ss to use the cues to make the dialogue &
practice the dialogue in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & the mistakes &
comments.


-T controls and corrects.


<i>- Listening to the dialogue.</i>
<i>- Using the cues to make the</i>
<i>dialogue & practice the</i>
<i>dialogue in pairs.</i>


<i>- Practicing the dialogue in</i>
<i>chorus.</i>


<i>- Practicing the dialogue in</i>
<i>pairs.</i>


<i>-Correcting pronunciation</i>
<i>& the</i> mistakes.


<i><b>Example exchange:</b></i>



Lan: Should we go to the
concert?


Mai: O.K.That's a great
idea.


Lan: What about you, Nam?
Nam: Sorry.I have to do my
homework.


Lan: How about you ,Hoa?
Hoa: Oh. I'd love to.


Now,let's go.
-Take notes.


<b> IV. Consolidation.(1m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this </b>
lesson.


<b> V.Homework.(1m) - Doing exercise ; - Study the vocabulary. </b>
- Prepare the suggestion & picture on page 64.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

<b>WEEK: 12</b>


Preparing day: 31/10/2010


<b>Period: 34 Unit 6 : AFTER SCHOOL</b>


<b>Lesson 4: LET'S GO ! <B1></b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to make suggestions with
"What should we do/ What about...".


<b> I.Knowledge. - Making suggestios with "What should we do/ What about...".</b>
<b> II. Skill . -Reading and speaking skills.</b>


<b>B . Ways of working : T –wc , pw , indi …</b>
<b>C . Materials : Picture p 64 , vcd , radio . </b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in answering the questions . T</b>
can help ss to explain them .


<b>E. Proceduce. I.Greeting .</b>


<b> II- Revision. -"slap the board"</b>
go to the concert listen to music
play computer game go to the movie
watch T.V


<b>III.New lesson.</b>


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Presentation.(20ms)</b>


a.Presentation dialogue. B1 P.60


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue.



- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in
pairs.


- Checks S’s practicing in groups & in
pairs.


- Introduces the model sentences &
helps Ss to practice.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


b.Model sentences.


T sets sence to give the model
sentences.


(S1:What should we do this evening?)
-What about going to the movie?


<b>-</b> Yes,that a great idea
<b>-</b> Sorry, I can't.


c.Comprehension questions.
- B1 P.61 a) - f)


-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer. Then give the
keys.



-Corrects & comments.


 Questions:


<i>1. What does Nam want to do ?</i>


<i>2. Why doesn’t Lan want to go to the</i>
<i>movies ? </i>


<i>3. What does Lan want to do ?</i>


<i>4. Why doesn’t Hoa want to go to Lan’s</i>
<i>house ?</i>


-Answer the questions of the
teacher.


-Read the dialogue carefully and
answer the quetions.


- Reading the dialogue in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.


-Ss give the concept check.( check
meaning, structure, using)




About + going to
-Ss prctice well



( open pairs, close pairs )


-Working in pairs to answer. Then
giving the keys.


 Answer:


<i>1. Nam want to go to the movies.</i>


<i>2. Because there aren’t any good</i>
<i>movies at the moment. </i>


<i>3. Lan want to go to her house to</i>
<i>listen to some music.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

<i>5. What day is it ?</i>


<b>2. Practice.(15ms)</b>
<b>-</b> "Word cue drill"
- Introduces the model sentence &
Helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example &
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in
individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the
next.



- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs .


-Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments


<b>3. Production.(8ms)</b>
<b>-</b> B1 P.36


(Workbook)


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss
to work in pairs to write down the
suggestion in the case of the possible
dialogue, using the cues in the box.
- Asks Ss to compare their dialogue.
- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in
pairs.


- Corrects & comments.


T controls and corrects.


<i>assignments 5. It’s Saturday.</i>


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.
Cues:



-go to the concert/yes
-listen to music/ yes


-play computer game/ sorry
-watch T.V/ yes


-go to school cafeteria/ sorry


-Ss work in pairs to make questions
and responses.


- Working in pairs to write down the
suggestion in the case of the possible
dialogue, using the cues in the box.
- Comparing & practicing the dialogue
in pairs.


 Dialogue:


Lan: Let’s go swimming.
Hoa: OK.


Minh: Should we play table tennis ?
Nam: I’m sorry. I can’t.


Ba: Would you like to play basket
ball ?


Nga: I’d love to.


-Take notes.
<b> IV. Consolidation.(1m)</b>


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


- Asks Ss to give the question & answer asking about after school activities:
<i>S1: What do you usually do after school ?</i>
<i> S2: I usually meet my friends.</i>


<b> V.Homework.(1m) - Study the vocabularies & the model by heart . </b>
-Writing a short paragraph to talk about your after school activities..


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

Preparing day: 31/10/2010


Teaching day: 7A:

7B:

7C:



<b>Unit 6 : AFTER SCHOOL</b>


<b>Lesson 5: LET'S GO ! <B2-4></b>



<b>Period: 35</b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details
about pupil's favorite leisure activities.


<b>I.Knowledge.</b>


- Pupil's favorite leisure activities
<b>II. Skill</b>



-Reading skill.


<b>B . Ways of working : T – wc , pw . indi.. </b>
<b>C . Materials : Survey , picture p 65 </b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in doing survey . T can do an </b>
example .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision. (3ms)</b>
-"Guessing game"
Ex:


Do you play computer games after school?
<b>-</b> Yes, I do.


<b>-</b> No, I don't.
<b>III.New lesson.</b>


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Pre-reading.(18ms)</b>


<i><b>a.Pre teach.</b></i>


-scout (n) hớng đạo sinh


-teenager (n) thiếu niên 13 -19 tuổi
-community service ( n) sự giúp đỡ


cộng đồng


-volunteer : ( n) tình nguyện viên
-campaign ( n) chiến dịch /đợt vận
động


- Introduces the words by
explaining the meaning, using
the situation.


- Reads the words for the
modal (3 times ). Then helps
SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in
individual & corrects the
mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb &
checks the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy
the words


<i><b>b.Checking vocab. </b></i>R.O.R


<i><b>c.Prediction.</b></i>


T asks Ss to predict things American



-Ss guess the meaning, pronunciation,
and practice the words well.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus
& in individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


-Copying the words.


-Play well.


-Ss predict things American teenagers
like to do best in their free time.


-Ss read the text and check their
predictions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

teenagers like to do best in their free
time.


-Introduces the requirement &
ask Ss to work in individual to
predict things American


teenagers like to do best in
their free time.


-Asks Ss to compare in pairs &
in groups.


-Asks Ss to give the
information.


-Corrects & comments.
<b>2. While-reading.(15ms)</b>


<i><b>a.Activity1:</b></i>


T asks Ss to read the text and check
their predictions.


*Answer key. in P.65 (Unit6- B2)


<i><b>b.Activity 2:</b></i>


-T asks Ss to read B4 P.66 and answer
the question" How do some teenagers
help the community?"


-Ex: help elderly people( shopping,
housework,clearn their yards,pait their
house...etc.)


<b>3. Post-reading. 7ms)</b>


T asks Ss to list 3 most popular


activities VietNamese teenagers like to
do help the community.


- Introduces the requirement &
asks Ss to work in individual to
write three most popular
activities Vietnamese
teenagers like to do to help
the community.


-Asks Ss to compare in pairs &
in groups.


-Asks Ss to give the
information.


-Corrects & comments.


predict the information things
American teenagers like to do
best in their free time.


-Giving the information.
-Ss to read B4 P.66 and answer the
question


-Ss list 3 most popular activities
VietNamese teenagers like to do help


the community.


-Ss work in group to practice.
-Take notes.


- Working in individual to write
three most popular activities
Vietnamese teenagers like to
do to help the community.


- Comparing the information in
pairs & in groups.


- Giving the information.


<b>IV. Consolidation.(1m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


- Study the content of the text.


- Exercise: Write about most popular activities Vietnamese
teenagers


like to do to help the community. Using the information you
have written.


- Prepare the exercises on part: Grammar practice.
-Preparing: Unit 6: B3



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

Preparing day: 1/11/2010


Teaching day: 7A:

7B:

7C:



<b>Unit 6 : AFTER SCHOOL</b>


<b>Lesson 6: LET'S GO ! <B3></b>



<b>Period: 36</b>


<b>A .Ains and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand
the way to make suggestions, arrangements and accept the
invitation.


<b>I.Knowledge.</b>


- Making suggestions, arrangements and accepting the invitation
<b>II. Skill</b>


-Reading and speaking skills.
<b>B . Ways fo working : T – wc , pw , indi …</b>
<b>C . Materials : Books , chalk , board , vcd , radio . </b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in reading B 4 . T can read </b>
and get ss to repeat .



<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision. (3ms)</b>
-"Sit back the board"
go shopping


.listen to music
go to the movie
watch T.V


play video game
III.New lesson.


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Presentation (20ms)</b>


a.Presentation dialogue.
<b>-</b> B3 P.66


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
text.


- Asks Ss to read the text in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


b.Model sentences.



T sets a scence to give the model sentences.
S1: Would you like to come to my house for
lunch?


S2: Yes, I'd love to/ (I'm sorry,I can't.)


<b>2. Practice.(15ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "Word cue drill"
-go shopping/ yes


-go to the movie/ yes
-play video game/ sorry
-listen to music/ yes
-go out for dinner/ sorry


- Introduces the example exchange &


- Reading the dialogue
in individual.


-Correcting the
pronunciation.


*Model sentence:


-Would you like to go
to my house for
lunch ?



<b>-</b> Yes, I’d love to.
<b>-</b> I’m sorry. I can’t.


<i><b>- Repeating in chorus</b></i>
& in individual.


- Making sentences for the
next cues.


- Practicing in groups & in
pairs .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

Helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first modal for example &
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in
individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the
next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


<b>3. Production.(5ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "Mapped dialogue"


<b></b>


-Would/you/go out/dinner? Yes/What
time....?


5:00 Where/can/meet?
Bus stop Yes./I/be/there
thanks/inviting/me




You're welcome Bye/See you
/Bye/See you


pronunciation.


* Example exchange:


S1: Would you like to go for
a walk ?


S2: Yes, I’d love to./ I’m
sorry. I can’t.


Ex:


Nam: What would you like
go out for dinner?



Lan:Yes,I'd love to.What
time?


Nam: At five o'clock.
Lan:Where can we meet?
Nam: At the bus stop.


Lan:Thanks for inviting me.
Nam:You're welcome.
Bye.See you soon.
Lan:Bye.See you soon.


<b>IV. Consolidation.(1m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
-Ask Ss to explain the way to use the


Present simple; The “Will future” & Preposition.
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson..


<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


- Study the grammar & the modal sentence.
- Prepare for the forty five minute test.


-Preparing: Unit 6:Language focus 2.


...
...
...


...
...


...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

<b>WEEK: 13</b>


Preparing ’s day: 7/11/2010


Teaching ’s day: 7A:

7B:

7C:



<b>LANGUAGE FOCUS 2</b>


<b>Period: 37</b>



<b>A . Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to cosolidate the
knowledge from unit 1 to unit 6.


<b>I.Knowledge.</b>


<b>-</b> Present progreesive tense
<b>-</b> simple present tense
<b>-</b> Adverbs of frequency
<b>-</b> Making suggestions
<b>II. Skill</b>


-Reading skill.



<b>B . Materials : Pictures p 68 , 69 , 70 . </b>
<b>C . Ways of working : T – wc , pw . </b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in review the present progress</b>
tense . T can explain it .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting</b>
<b>II- Revision.</b>
III.New lesson.


Teacher's activities Students'activities
1. Present progressive tense.


T asks Ss give the structure and the way of using.
Ex: S + (to) be + V-ing + O.


<S + (to)be-not + V-ing + O>
<(To)Be + S + V-ing + O ?>


<diễn tả những hành động đang xảy ra ngay lúc nói>
-T controls and corrects.


T gives exercise 1 P.68 to asks Ss to do well.
*Answer key.


-doing
-is writing
-is reading


-is cooking
-are playing
-is kiching
- is running.


2. Adverbs of frequency.
<b>-</b> "Find S.O who"
<b></b>


-Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sart Sun
go to


cafeteria Lan ...
ride bike


to school


-Ss remind and answer.


-Ss do Ex.1 in group.


-Ss put the ask and answer.
Ex:


S1:Do you go to cafeteria on
Monday, Lan?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

practice
guitar
after


school
do


homework
evening


3. Vocabulary subjects.
T gives 6 pictures in book P.70.
*Answer key.


Picture a :Physical education
Picture b:Chemistry


Picture c: Math


Picture d: Geography
Picture e: English


Picture f: History
-T corrects.


-Ss write the correct
subjects.


<b>IV. Consolidation.</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework.</b>


-Doing exercise :



-Preparing: Written test 45 minutes.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

Preparing day: 8/11/ 2010


Teaching day: 7A:

7B:

7C:



<b>Period 38 : WRITTEN TEST II</b>


<b>Time: 45 minutes</b>



<b>A . Aims and objectives : Hepl ss to check their knowledge from unit 1 to unit 4 </b>
. By the end of the test ss will be able to learn better and teacher can help them
the way to learn well next period .


<b>B . Ways of working : individual work </b>
<b>C . Materials : paper test . </b>


<b>E . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in listening . T can read </b>
slowly and carefully .


<b>F . Procedure : </b>


<b>Name:...</b>
Class: 7...


Marks Teacher ‘s comments


<b>I .Listen and match each name with an activity (1ms ) </b>
Mai * * skipping rope



* playing catch
Kien * * Playing marbles
* playing blind ’s bluff
Ba *


Lan *


<b>II.Find the one word out. (1m)</b>


A . teenager B . student C . neighborhood D . clean


A . nice B . well C . new D . late


A . author B . writing C. stories D .


paintings


A . Music B . History C . vocabulary D. Physics
<b>III.Choose the best answer( a,b,c or d) (2,5ms)</b>


<b>1. Let’s...a game.</b>


a. to play b. play c. plays d. plaing


<b>2. It’s time...recess.</b>


a. on b.in c.for d.a


<b>3. What ...? - I’m studying Math.</b>



a. are you studying? b. do you study?
c. you are studying? d.are you study?
<b>4. What are you going to do after school?</b>


a. I play volleyball b. I’m going to play volleyball.
c.I go home d. a& b are correct


<b>5.They talk...their class.</b>


a. at b. on c. about d.in


<b>6. How often does he go to the library?</b>
a. He often goes there after school.
b. He goes often there after school.
c. He often go there after school.
d. He goes there after school.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

a. how b. what c. which d. why
<b>8. Those books ...the back of the library are in English.</b>


a.in b.on c.at d.under


<b>9. Which... do you like best? - I like English best.</b>


a. subject b. room c. school d.sport


<b>10. American students take part ... different activities at </b>
recess.


a. on b. at c. about d.in



<b>IV.Complete the sentences.( 1M)</b>


<b>1.He writes for Ha Noi newspaper. He is a...</b>
<b>2.She takes care of sick people in a hospital. She is a...</b>
<b>3. They work on their farm. They are ...</b>
<b>4.She teaches in a school. She is a...</b>
<b>V.Fill in the blank with one word in the box.(1M)</b>


<b>talk</b> <b>president</b> <b>bring</b> <b>stamps</b>


Ba is the ...(1) of the stamp collector’s club. On Wednesday
afternoon, he and his friends get together and ...(2) about their
stamps. If they have any new ...(3), they usually ...(4)
them to school. Ba’s American school, Liz, give him a lot of American satmps.


<b>Answer the questions: (1M)</b>


1.When does the stamp collector’s club meet?


...
.


2.Who is the president of the stamp collector’s club?


...
.


<b>VI.Rearrange the given words into sentences. (1,5Ms)</b>
1./Lan’s house/ let’s/ go/ to/



...
<b>2./group/ her/ rehearsing/ a play/is/.</b>


...
3.start/ time/ does/what/the movie /


………..
the end


Preparing day: 9/11/2010


Teaching day: 7A:

7B:

7C:



Check the test II



<b>Time : 45 minutes.</b>
<b>Period : 39</b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the
knowledge from the text.


<b>I.Knowledge.</b>


-The present simple.
-The "Will" future
-The prepositions
<b>II. Skill</b>



-Writting skill


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

<b>C . Materials : paper test .</b>


<b>D .Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in ex IV .t can help them to </b>
correct .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>
II- Revision.


Teacher's activities Students'activitie


s
<b>I . listen and match ( 1m) </b>


Mai – skipping rope
Lan – playing catch


Kien – playing blindman ’s bluff
Ba – playing marbles


<b>II.Find the one word out. (1m)</b>


a.teenager b.student c.neighborhood d.clean


a.nice b.well c.new d.late


a.author b.writingc.stories d.paintings


a.Music b.History c.vocabulary


d.Physics


<b>III.Choose the best answer( a,b,c or d) (2,5M)</b>
<b>1. Let’s...a game.</b>


a. to play b. play c. plays d. plaing
<b>2. It’s time...recess.</b>


a. on b.in c.for d.a


<b>3. What ...? - I’m studying Math.</b>
a. are you studying? b. do you study?


c. you are studying? d.are you study?
<b>4. What are you going to do after school?</b>


a. I play volleyball b. I’m going to play volleyball.
c.I go home d. a& b are correct
<b>5.They talk...their class.</b>


a. at b. on c. about d.in


<b>6. How often does he go to the library?</b>
a. He often goes there after school.
b. He goes often there after school.
c. He often go there after school.
d. He goes there after school.



<b>7. She learns ... to use a computer.</b>


a. how b. what c. which d. why


<b>8. Those books ...the back of the library are in </b>
English.


a.in b.on c.at d.under


<b>9. Which... do you like best? - I like English best.</b>
a. subject b. room c. school d.sport
<b>10. American students take part ... different </b>
activities at recess.


a. on b. at c. about d.in


<b>IV.Complete the sentences.( 1M)</b>


<b>1.He writes for Ha Noi newspaper. He is a...</b>
<b>2.She takes care of sick people in a hospital. She is a...</b>
<b>3. They work on their farm. They are ...</b>
<b>4.She teaches in a school. She is a...</b>
<b>V.Fill in the blank with one word in the box.(1M)</b>


<b>talk</b> <b>president</b> <b>bring</b> <b>stamps</b>


Ba is the ...(1) of the stamp collector’s club. On
Wednesday afternoon, he and his friends get together


<b>answer key</b>


-Ss give the
asnwer and takes
notes the correct
of teacher


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

and ...(2) about their stamps. If they have any
new ...(3), they usually ...(4) them to
school. Ba’s American school, Liz, give him a lot of American
satmps.


<b>Answer the questions: (1M)</b>


1.When does the stamp collector’s club meet?


...
2.Who is the president of the stamp collector’s club?


...
<b>VI.Write the sentences. Use the cue words. (1,5Ms)</b>


1./Lan’s house/ let’s/ go/ to/


...
<b>2./group/ her/ rehearsing/ a play/is/.</b>


...
3./ time/ does/what/the movie/start/?/


...



1 . They meet on
Wednesday
afternoon .
2 . Ba is …
<b>VI</b>


1.Let’s go to
Lan’s house.
2.Her group is
rehearsing a play.
3.What time does
the movie strat?


<b>IV. Consolidation.</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main grammar in this text.
<b>V.Homework.</b>


-Doing exercise : doing again the text at home.
-Preparing: Unit 7 :A1


<b>WEEK: 14</b>


Preparing day: 14/11/2010


Teaching day: 7A:

7B:

7C:



<b>Unit 7 : THE WORLD OF WORK</b>


<b>Lesson 1: A STUDENT WORK<A1></b>




<b>Period: 40</b>


<b>A .Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about activities at
school and in vacation.


<b>I.Knowledge.</b>


- Activities at school and in vacation.
<b>II. Skill</b>


-Reading and speaking drill.
<b>B . Ways of working : T – wc , pw , gw .</b>


<b>C . Materials : Picture p72 , vcd , radio , T /f statements </b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in answering . T can explain </b>
the questions and let hem to play lucky numbers .


<b>E . Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>
<b>II- Revision.</b>


-"Slap the board"(5ms)


vacation go to the seaside


do my homework play soccer work on a farm
III.New lesson.



<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>1. Presentation.(10ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue.


- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in
pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


b.Comprehension questions.
<b>-</b> A1 P.73


- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to
work in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.


- Asks Ss to give the answer keys.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
* Questions:


a. What time do Hoa’s classes start ?
b. What time do they finish ?


c. For how many hours a day does Hoa
do her homework ?


d. What will Hoa do during her


vacation ?


e. What about you ? Do your classes
start earlier or later ? Do you work
fewer than Hoa ?


f. When does your school year start ?
g. When doe sit finish ?


<b>2. Practice.(18ms)</b>
-"Question-Answer drill"
T asks Ss real questions.
-Guiding questions.


- Asks Ss the questions &
requires them to answer.


- Corrects S’s answers & comments.
* Questions:


a. What time do your classes start ?
b. What time do they finish ?


c. How many lessons do you have on
Mondays ?


d. How many hours do you do your
homework ?


e. When will you have a vacation ?


f. How long does your vacation last ?


<b>3. Production.(10ms)</b>
<b>-</b> "Survey"


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss
to work in pairs asks & answer the
question “<b>What will you do during</b>
<b>your vacation ?”</b>


- Asks Ss to compare their answering.
- Asks Ss to give the answers.


- Corrects & comments.
-T controls and corrects.


- Practicing the dialogue in pairs
-Correcting the pronunciation.


-Ss must answer truthfully and then Ss
work in open pairs- close pairs.


- Working in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.


- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting


* Answer:



a. Hoa’s classes start at 7.00.
b. They finish at 11.15.


c. Hoa does her homework two hours a
day


d. She will go & see her parents.


e. My classes start at the same time
with Hoa’s classes. I work fewer than
Hoa .


f. My school year start in September.
g. It finish in June.


- Answering the questions.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
a. My classes start at 7.00.
b. They finish at 11.15.


c. I have five lessons on Monday.
d. It takes two hour for me to do my
home work .


e. I will have a vacation in June.
f. It will last in three months


- Working in pairs asks & answer the
question “<b>What will you do during</b>


<b>your vacation ?”</b>


- Comparing their answering.
- Giving the answers.


Activities Name


Go to the seaside Nam
....


-Ss practice well.
<b>IV. Consolidation.(1m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

- Prepare the vocabulary & the letter on page 73.
-Preparing: Unit 7: A2-3


Preparing day: 15 /11/2010


Teaching day: 7A:

7B:

7C:



<b>Unit 7 : THE WORLD OF WORK</b>


<b>Lesson 2: A STUDENT WORK<A2-3></b>



<b>Period: 41</b>


<b>A . Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details


about some vacations in America and Britain.


<b>I.Knowledge.</b>


-Vacations in America and Britain.
<b>II. Skill</b>


-Reading skill.


<b>B. Ways of working : T –wc , pw , open prediction .</b>
<b>C. Materials : vcd radio .</b>


<b>D . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in A3 .T can help the ss </b>
predict before listening .


<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision.(2ms)</b>
-"Shark attack"
-Vacation


-Holiday
III.New lesson.


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>1. Pre-reading.(13ms)</b>


<i><b>a.Pre teach.Vocabulary </b></i>



-Thanksgiving : (n ) lễ tạ ơn


-Easter ; (n)lễ phục sinh là ngày lễ cuối tuần
cuối tháng 3 đầu tháng 4


-Christmas : (n) lễ giang sinh


-Independence Day (n) lễ độc lập , ngày quốc
khánh


-turkey : (n) con gà tây
-firework : (n) pháo hoa


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.


<i><b>b.Checking vocab.</b></i>


<b>-</b> R.O.R



<i><b>c.T/F statements prediction.</b></i>


<b>1)</b> The longest vacation in America is
the spring.


<b>2)</b> The most important vacations in
America are Easter,4th of


July,Thanksgiving and Christmas.
<b>3)</b> The American usually spend time


with their ffamilies on these
vacations.


- Listening to the words.
- Repeating the words in
chorus & in individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the game.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

<b>4)</b> American students have more


vacations than VietNemese students.


<b>2. While-reading.(20ms)</b>


<b>a.Check-prediction.</b>


-T asks Ss to read the text and check their
prediction.


- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in
pairs to predict the statements.


- Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys.
- Comments.


<b>b. Presentation text: A2/P73.</b>


- Introduces & Helps Ss toread the text.


- Asks Ss to read the text in individual & check
their prediction.


- Asks Ss to correct the keys.
- Corrects comments.


<b>3. Post-reading.(8ms)</b>


a.T asks Ss to predict the name of the public
holiday in each of the pictures P.74


<i><b>*Answer</b></i>.Thanksgiving



<b>a)</b> Independence Day
<b>b)</b> New Year's Day
<b>c)</b> Christmas


b.T asks Ss to work in groups to list holidays in
VietNam.


<i><b>Ex:</b></i>


 New Year's day


 Children's Day


 ....etc.
-T controls and corrects.


-Ss read the text and check
their prediction.


<i><b>*Answer key.</b></i>


<b>1)</b> F
<b>2)</b> T
<b>3)</b> T
<b>4)</b> T


- Reading the dialogue in
individual & check their
prediction.



- Correcting the keys.
* Answer keys:


a. F; b. T; c. T; d. F;
-Ss predict the name of the
public holiday in each of the
pictures P.74.


-Ss work in groups to list
holidays in VietNam.


<b>IV. Consolidation.(1m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.Asks Ss to summarize the
general idea of the lesson & compare the holidays between America & Viet
Nam.


<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


- Study the vocabularies by heart .


- Writing five sentences talking about what you do on your vacation.


- Prepare the vocabulary & the picture on page 75 & the time in which Ss work
in school.


-Preparing: Unit 7: A4
Preparing day: 16 /11/2010


Teaching day: 7A:

7B:

7C:




<b>Unit 7 : THE WORLD OF WORK</b>


<b>Lesson 3: A STUDENT WORK<A4></b>



<b>Period: 42</b>


<b>A . Aims and Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details
about a typical day of a student.


<b>I.Knowledge.</b>


-A typical day of a student.
<b>II. Skill</b>


-Reading skill.


<b>B . Ways of working : T -wc , pw .</b>


<b>C . Materials : pictures p75 , T /F statements Lucky numbers .</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

<b>E. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision.(6ms)</b>


-christmast/young/orange/expensive/turkey
III.New lesson.


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>


<b>1. Pre-reading.(10ms)</b>


a.T/F statements prediction.


<b>1)</b> Many people think that
students have an easy life.
<b>2)</b> Students work a few hours


week.


<b>3)</b> Students do not have to
work hard at school.
<b>4)</b> Hoa is in grade.


- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to
work in pairs to decide which the
statements is true or false.


- Asks Ss to compare the keys give the
keys.


- Comments.


<b>b. Presentation text: A4 /P75.</b>


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the
text.


- Asks Ss to read the text in individual
& check their prediction.



- Asks Ss to correct the keys.
- Corrects & comments.


<b>2. While-reading.(20ms)</b>


a.t asks Ss to read the text and check
their prediction.


b.Wh-questions.


<b>-</b> a)-d) P.75


- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to
work in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.


- Asks Ss to give the answer keys.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
T adds 5 question to ask Ss to play a
game "Lucky nuber".


<b>1)</b> How many periods a day does
Hoa have?


<b>2)</b> L


<b>3)</b> Does Hoa study hard?


<b>4)</b> What does she have to do before


tests?


<b>5)</b> L


<b>6)</b> How many periods a day do you
have?


<b>7)</b> Do you think you are lazy?
<b>8)</b> L


<b>3. Post-reading.(7ms)</b>
- Retell a story about Hoa


- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss
to work in individual to retell the story
about Hoa.


- Asks Ss to retell the story.
- Comments.


-Ss perdict.


- Working in pairs to decide which the
statements is true or false.


- Comparing & Giving the keys.


- Reading the text in individual &
check their prediction.



- Correcting the keys.
* Answer keys:


a. T; b. F; c. F; d. F;
- Working in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.


- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting


- Working in individual to retell the
story about Hoa.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

<b>IV. Consolidation.(1m)</b>


-.Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson & compare the working
time between Hoa & themselves.


<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


- Writing five sentences talking about how long does it take you to work on a
week.


- Prepare the vocabulary & the picture on page 76 .
-Preparing: Unit 7: B1


<b>VI .Can improve </b>


...


...
...
...


The end


<b>WEEK: 15</b>


Preparing ’s day: 22/11/2010


<b>Unit 7 : THE WORLD OF WORK</b>


<b>Lesson 4: THE WORKER<B1 - 4></b>



<b>Period: 43</b>



<b>A . Aims</b>

: Help ss to talk about occpations and listen to the jobs of


some people .



<b>B . Objectives .-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about </b>
occupations , using : house , mechanic , farmer .


<b>I.Knowledge. occupations </b>


<b>III. Skill -Reading and listening . </b>
<b>C .Ways of working :T – wc , pw , </b>


<b>D . Materials : Picture p 76 , T / F , vdc radio .</b>


<b>E . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in listening B4 . T can help </b>
them to predict and read if possible .



<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision.(5ms)</b> cook


<b>-</b> "Brainstorming"


Activities


... ...


watch T.V
(Ss brainstorm activities they do everyday)
III.New lesson.


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>1. Presentasion .(15ms)</b>


<i><b>*Vocabulary</b></i>:


-(to) work part time : làm việc bán thời
gian


-(to) repair machine : (picture) : sửa
chữa máy móc.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

-homeless people : ngời vô gia c
-days off : ngày nghĩ



- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.


<i><b>a.Checking vocab.</b></i>


<b>-</b> R.O.R


<i><b>b.Presentation text.</b></i>


<b>-</b> B1 P.76


- Introduces & Asks Ss to read the
letter


- Checks S’s reading.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments<i><b> .</b></i>



<i><b>c.Comprehension questions.</b></i>


- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to
work in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.


- Asks Ss to give the answer keys.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.


1) where does Mrs Jones work?
2) What does she do for homeless


people ?


3) What does Mr Jones do?
4) Where does he work?


5) How many days a week does he
work?


6) How many public holidays does
he get?


<b>2. Practice.(15ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "Question-Answer
drill"


- Introduces the real questions & asks


Ss to work in pairs to answer truthfully.
- Asks Ss to give the answer by
practicing in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


T asks Ss real questions.


<b>1)</b> What does your father/ mother
do?


<b>2)</b> Where does he/she work?
<b>3)</b> How many hours a day does


your father /mother work?
<b>4)</b> How many days a week does


your father/mother work?


<b>5)</b> How many days off a week does
he/she get?


<b>3. Production.(8ms)</b>


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.



- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the game.
- Reading the text.


- Correcting the pronunciation.


- Working in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.


- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting


* Answer:


a. Mrs. John work at home.


b. She cooks lunch for homeless
people.


c. Mr. John is a mechanic.
d. He works in a factory.
e. He work five days a week .



f. He gets about seven public holidays.
-Ss must answer truthfully and then Ss
work in open pairs-close pairs.


(Step of practice: T-Ss-open pairs-close
pairs)


<b>- Working in pairs to answer the</b>
questions.


- Giving the answer by practicing in
pairs.


- Corrects the pronunciation.
Answer:


1. My father/ mother is a….
2. He/ she work in a …….


3. My father/ mother work …hours a
day.


4. My father/ mother work….days a
week.


5. He / she gets …..days off a week<i><b> . </b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

<b>-B4 ; listen and take note :</b>


Get ss to predict before listening . Then


listen 3 times and check


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss
to work in pairs to transform the
information & write a new message by
replacing the underlined words.


- asks Ss to report their writing.
- Corrects & comments


<i><b>"Transformation writing"</b></i>


My mother works at school. She takes
care of her students. she gets off at
<b>6:00 every morning. She has </b>


<b>breakfast, and hen she goes to class. </b>
She always helps weak students.She
works 40 hours a week.She has four
<b>vacations a year.</b>


My father is a worker. He works 8
hours day. He has two days off a
month . When he has free time he
<b>plays soccer.</b>


-T controls and corrects.


- Reporting their writing.
Names Jobs Hours



per
week


Amount
Of
vacation
Peter Doctor 70 4 weeks


Susan Nurse 50 3 weeks


Jane Shop


assitant 35 1 week


Phong Worker 48 2 weeks


TAPE CRIPT :


-Peter is a doctor in a hospital .He is on
duty ( phận sự ) for about 70 hours a
week . He has four weeks vacation
each year .


- Susan is a nurse . She is on duty for
50 hours a week . She has three weeks
vacation a year .


- Jane is a shop assitant . She works 30
hours a week . She has 1 week vacation


a year .


- Phong is a factory working . He
works 48 hours a week . He has an
annual vacation of 2 weeks .


<b>IV. Consolidation.(1m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


- Study the vocabulary .
- Write about you typical day.


- Prepare the vocabulary & the picture on P77 & read the text at home..
- Preparing: Unit 7: B2-5


<b>VI.Can improve </b>


...
...
...
...


THE END


Preparing ’s day: 23/11/2010


<b>UNIT 7 : THE WORLD OF WORK</b>


<b>Lesson 5 : THE WORKER<B2-3></b>




<b>Period: 44</b>



<b>A . Aims : -Help ss to know the daily duties of the farmer </b>


<b>B : Objectives .-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the </b>
details about a typical working day of Vietnamese and American.


<b>I.Knowledge.-A typical working day of Vietnamese and American.</b>
<b>III. Skill - Reading skill.</b>


<b>C . Ways of working : T – wc , pw . </b>
<b>D </b>


<b> . Materials : Picture p 77 , matching . </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b> I.Greeting</b>


<b>II- Revision.(5ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "Slap the board"


have breakfast work in the field vacation
day off clean look after
III.New lesson.


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>1. Pre-reading.(15ms)</b>



a.pre - teach.


-(to) start work : bắt đầu làm việc
-(to) feed : cho ăn


-(to) rest : nghỉ ngơi
-(to) eat lunch : ăn trưa


- a buffalo shed : chuồng trâu
- a chicken coop : chuồng gà


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Checking vocab.


<b>-</b> R.O.R
c.T/F prediction



- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to
work in pairs to predict the statements.
- Asks Ss to compare the keys give the
keys & Comments.


1) Hoa's father is a farmer.


2) Her father works in the fields at 5
p.m


3) Her father rests and eats lunch
from 12 to 1 o'clock.


4) A farmer has real vacations.
<b>b. Presentation text: B1 / P76.</b>
- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the
letter.


- Asks Ss to read the letter in individual
& check their prediction.


- Asks Ss to correct the keys.
- Corrects & comments.


<b>2. While-reading.(15ms)</b>
a.Check prediction.


b.Wh-questions.


-T gives 9 qs to ask Ss to play a



- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the game.


- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to
work in pairs to predict the statements.
- Asks Ss to compare the keys give
the keys & Comments.


- Reading the letter in individual.


-Check their prediction.
- Correcting the keys.


<i>Answer keys: a. T; b. F; c. T; d.</i>
<i>F; </i>


- Working in pairs to ask & answer
the questions.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

game"Noughts and Crosses".


- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to
work in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.


- Asks Ss to give the answer keys.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.


a) What is Hoa's father name?
b) Does he work more hours than


Tim's father?


c) What time does he usually start
work?


d) What does he do in the morning?
e) When does he work in the field?
f) What does he do in the field?
g) What time does he come back


home?


h) What does he do after he feeds
the animal again?


i) How often does he take a day
off?



<b>3. Post-reading.(8ms)</b>
*Pre-listening.


b.Open prediction.


Name Job Hours


per
week
Amount
of
vacation
Peter
Susan
Jane
Phong
*While-listening.
T turns on the tape.
*Answer key.


Name Job Hours


per
week


Amount
of


vacation



Peter doctor 70 four


weeks


Susan nurse 50 three


weeks
Jane shop


assitant 35 one weeks
Phong


factory-worker


48 two


weeks
T controls and corrects.


&Commenting
* Answer:


a. Hoa’s father’s name is Tuan.


b. Yes. He works more hours than
Tim’s father .


c. He usually starts work at six in the
morning.



d. In the morning, he has breakfast,
then he feeds the animals & collects
the eggs.


e. He works in the field from about 9
until 4 in the afternoon .


f. He grows some rice & vegetable in
the field .


g. He come back home at 4 in the
afternoon.


h. He cleans the buffalo shed & the
chicken cool after he feeds the animal
again.


i. He takes a day off four or five times
a year.


- Working in pairs to predict the
statements & fill in the table.


- Comparing & Giving the keys.


- Listening to the tape & getting the
information.


- Listening to the tape & checking the


information of their prediction.


- Comparing & giving the keys.


- Listening to the tape & Correcting
the keys.


<b>IV. Consolidation.(1M)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.


-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson & compare


The differences of a typical working day between America & Vietnamese
<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

- Writing five sentences talking about your typical working day.
-Preparing: Unit 8: A1-2


<b>VI.Can improve :</b>


...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

Preparing ’s day: 28/11/2009


<b>Unit 8 : PLACE</b>




<b>Lesson 1: ASKING THE WAY<A1-2 -3></b>


<b>Period: 45</b>



<b>A. Aims : Help ss to know the name of the store and aks facilities give the </b>
direction .


<b>B . Objectives .-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to ask for and </b>
give the directions.


<b>I.Knowledge.- Asking for and giving the directions.</b>
<b>III. Skill : - Reading and speaking drill.</b>


<b>C . Ways of working : t – wc , pw .</b>


<b>D . Materials : picture p 79 , 80 , 81 , vcd ,radio . </b>


<b>E . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in B3 p81 . T can get ss </b>
answer about the map before listening .


<b>F . Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision.(5ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "Matching"( Matching the words with the pictures A1 P.79)
1) National bank of Vietnam picture a


<b>2)</b> Xanh pon hospital picture b
<b>3)</b> Hotel picture c
<b>4)</b> Post office picture d


<b>5)</b> Rainway station picture e
<b>6)</b> Market


<b>III.New lesson.</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>1. Presentation.(15ms)</b>


a.Pre teach. Vocabulary


-Souvenir shop (n )cửa hàng đồ lưu
niệm


-shoe store ( n) cửa hàng dày
-toy store ( n) cửa hàng đồ chơi
-museum ( n) viện bảo tàng
-go straight a head : đi thẳng


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times
). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words



- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> "slap the board"
c.Presentation dialogue.


<b>-</b> A1 P.79


- Introduces & Asks Ss to listen to the
dialogue .


- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in
groups & in pairs.


- Checks S’s practicing in groups & in
pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments .



- Introduces the model sentences &
explains how to use.


- Helps Ss to practice the model
sentences in groups & in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments


2. <b>Practice.(18ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "Word cue drill"
- Introduces the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example &
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in
individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the
next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


-shoe store/ go ahead



-toy store/ go ahead/ turn right
-museum/ go straight/ take the first
street


-bus stop/ turn left
<b>3. Production.(5MS)</b>


A 3 Look at this map practice the
dilogue with a partner .


-a ,ask for and give the direction to this
places .


- b , listen and write the place .


<b>-</b> A1 P.47 (work book)
Complete the dialogue: A1-P47- S’s


- Listening to the dialogue .


- Practicing the dialogue in groups &
in pairs.


- Correcting the pronunciation.
<b> Model sentences:</b>


<i>+ Could you show me the way to the</i>
<i>souvenir shop ?</i>


<i>+ Could you tell me how to get to the</i>


<i>souvenir shop ?</i>


<i>+ Go straight ahead.</i>
<i>+ turn right / left.</i>


<i>+ Take the first street on the</i>
<i>right.</i>


<i> second </i>
<i>left</i>


<i><b>- Repeating in chorus & in individual.</b></i>
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
<b> Example exchange:</b>


S1: Could you show me the way to
<i>the zoo?</i>


S2: Go straight ahead.


- Working in pairs to fill in the
dialogue.


- Giving the answer keys by
role-playing in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

book



- Introduces the dialogues & asks Ss to
work in pairs to fill in the dialogue.
- Asks S’s to give the answer keys by
role-playing in pairs.


- Corrects & comments S’s
pronunciation.


TAPE CRIPT :


-go straight a head to the second
street . Turn left .What is on the
right ?


- go straight a head .Turn right into
the first treet .What is on the left next
to the restaurant ? What is on your
left .


- go to the second street .Turn
right .What is opposite the hotel ?
Wwhat is on your right ?


Answer :


A , souvenir shop
B , shose store
C , hotel


D , drugstore


E , hospital
-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework.(1M)</b>


- Study the vocabulary & the exchanges .
- Exercise: A1 / 2 P47 Work book


- Prepare the vocabulary & the poster on page 81.
-Preparing: Unit 8: A4 ,5


<b>VI.Can im prove </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

<b>WEEK: 16</b>


Preparing’s day: 29/11/2010


<b>Unit 8 : PLACE</b>



<b>Lesson 2: ASKING THE WAY<A4 -5></b>


<b>Period: 46</b>



<b>A . Aims Help ss to talk about th distances using “ How far …….from ….to ? ” </b>
<b>B . Objectives .-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to ask about </b>
distances,use "How far is it from...to...?"


<b> I.Knowledge. - Asking about distances,using "How far is it </b>
from...to...?"


<b>II. Skill : - Reading and speaking drill</b>
<b>C .</b>



<b> Ways of working : T- wc , pw .</b>
<b> D . Material s :Amap p 82 , vcd radio . </b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in practicing A5 . T can make </b>
an example for them .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision.(3ms)</b>
-"Bingo"


18,680,1030,367,976,635,325,132,87,75,46,937,1000,700,600,570.
III.New lesson.


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>1. Presentation.(17ms)</b>


a.Presentation dialogue.
<b>-</b> A4 P.82


- Introduces & Asks Ss to listen to the
dialogue .


- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups &
in pairs.


- Checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments<i><b> .</b></i>


- Introduces the model sentences & explains
how to use.


- Helps Ss to practice the model sentences in
groups & in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments<i><b> .</b></i>


b.Model sentences.


S1: how far is it from Dong Ha to Gio Linh?
S2:It's about 12km


<b>2. Practice. (15ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "Word cue drill"


2- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .



- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


<i>-Vinh/ 319km</i>
<i>-Hue/ 688km</i>


- Listening to the dialogue .
- Practicing the dialogue in
groups & in pairs.


- Correcting the pronunciation.


<b>-</b> Model sentences:
<i>How far is this from…to …?</i>
<i> It’s about 1.300 km.</i>


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in
individual.


- Making sentences for the
next cues.


- Practicing in groups & in
pairs .


- Correcting the pronunciation


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

<i>-Da Nang/ 791km</i>


<i>-Ho Chi Minh city/ 1726km</i>



<b>3. Production.(7ms)</b>


<b>-</b> “Noughts and Crosses”
T asks Ss to make qs and answer about
distances from your town to some places.
- Introduces the name of the places & divides
Ss into two groups to practice by making
questions & answers about distances from their
town to some places .


- Asks S’s to give the answer keys by
role-playing in pairs.


- Corrects & comments the game.


Nha Trang Hue Hai Phong
Ho Chi Minh city Vinh HaNoi
Quy Nhon Quang Binh Da Nang
-T asks Ss to use real distance to answer the
question.


-T corrects.


S1: How far is this from Vinh
<i>to Hanoi ?</i>


S2: It’s about 319 km.


- Working in groups to make
questions & answers about


distances from their town to
some places .


- Giving the answer keys by
role-playing in pairs.


- Correcting S’s pronunciation.


<i>Example exchange:</i>


S1: How far is it from Quang
Tri to Nha Trang?


S2: It’s about 900km.


<b>IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.


-Asks Ss to give the question & answer asking about distances:
<b> </b><i>S1: How far is this from Quang Tri to Hanoi ?</i>


<i>S2: It s about 630 km</i>’ <i>.</i>


<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


- Study the vocabulary & the exchanges .


-Write about the distances from your house to some places in your
neighborhood.



- Prepare the vocabulary for the dialogue & the picture on page 83.
-Preparing: Unit 8: B1,5


<b>VI.Can improve </b>


…...
... THE END


Preparing’s day:30/11/2010


<b>Unit 8 : PLACE</b>



<b>Lesson 3: AT THE POST OFFICE<B1></b>


<b>Period: 47</b>



<b>A . Aims :Help ss know “ How much …..? “ to talk about the price and some </b>
vocabulary about the post office .


<b>B . Objectives .-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to enquire about </b>
price and make purchases, use “I’d like…./how much is/are….?”


<b>I.Knowledge.- Enquiring about price and making purchases, using “I’d </b>
like…./how much is/are….?”


<b>II. Skill : - Reading and speaking drill.</b>
<b>C .</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

<b>E . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in answering the questions .T</b>
can explain the questions .



<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision.(5ms)</b>
-“Slap the board”


9.500 2.000 12.500 15.000


<b>-</b> 10.000


III.New lesson.


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1. Presentation.(20ms)</b>


a.Pre teach.


-change (n) tiền lẻ


-altogether (adv) tổng cộng , tính
gộp lại


-(to) send = (to) post : gửi đi
-(to) mail gửi thư , (n) thư tín
-(to) receive : nhận


-(to) pay: trả tiền
-stamp ( n) tem



-a writing pad ( n) tờ giấy
-envelope ( n) phong b×


- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.
- Reads the words for the modal3
times. Then helps SS to repeat 2 times
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb &
checks the meaning & the
pronunciation.


-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the
words.


-Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the game.



.


b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> “What and Where”
c.Presentation dialogue.


<b>-</b> B1 P.83


- Introduces & Asks Ss to listen to the
dialogue .


- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in
groups & in pairs.


- Checks S’s practicing in groups &
in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments<i><b> .</b></i>


- Introduces the model sentences &
explains how to use.


- Helps Ss to practice the model


- Listening to the dialogue .


- Practicing the dialogue in groups & in


pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

sentences in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments


d.Comprehension questions.
<b>-</b> B1 P.83
<b>2. Practice.(10ms)</b>


<b>-</b> “Word cue drill”
- Introduces the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example &
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in
individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the
next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


-buy/ three stamps/ 2.400 dong
-send this letter/ 13.000 dong
-buy/ magazine/ 15.000 dong


-buy/ newspaper/ 10.000 dong
-buy/ some envelopes/ 4.5000 dong
<b>3. Production(7ms)</b>


Answer the questions: B5-P85:


- Introduces the questions & Asks Ss
to work in pairs to answer the
questions.


- Asks Ss to give the answers &
corrects.


* Questions:


a. How much is it to mail a local
letter in Viet Nam ?


b. How much is a letter to America ?
c. What does the post office sell apart
from stamps ?


d. Do you write to anyone overseas ?
Who?


<i>.Model sentences.</i>


S1: I’d like to send this letter to USA.
How much is it?



S2: It’s 9.500 dong.


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation


<i>Example exchange:</i>


S1:I’d like to buy a magazine. How
much is it?


S2: It’s 3.000 dong.


- Working in pairs to answer the
questions.


- Giving the answers & correcting.
* Answers:


a. It’s about 2.000 dong to mail a letter
in Viet Nam.


b. It’s about 20.000 dong to send a letter
America


c. It sells newspaper, magazine.
d. Yes, I do / No I don’t.


<b>IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>



-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.


-Asks Ss to give the question & answer asking about prices:
<b> - S1: How much is it card ?</b>


<i><b> S2: It’s 9.500 dong.</b></i>
<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


- Study the vocabulary & the exchanges .
- Exercise: B3 – P52 Workbook.


- Prepare the vocabulary for the dialogues & the picture on page 84.
-Preparing: Unit 8: B2–4


<b>VI.Can improve </b>


……...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

Preparing’s day:30/11/2010


<b>Unit 8 : PLACE</b>



<b>Lesson 4: AT THE POST OFFICE<B2 -3 ></b>


<b>Period: 48</b>



<b>A . Aims :Help ss know some vocabulary about the post office and understand </b>


the idea of the dialogue .


<b>B . Objectives .-By the end of this lesson, students will be able totalk about </b>
many thing at the post offfice and how to use them .


<b> I . knowledge : - making dialogueabout the post office , using “I’d </b>
like…./how much is/are….?”


<b>II. Skill : - speaking drill.</b>
<b>C .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T –wc , pw , indi… . </b>
<b>D . Materials : picture p84 , vcd ,radio . </b>


<b>E . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in answering the questions .T</b>
can explain the questions .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision.(5ms)</b>


Jumbled words : -snde – send
-psto – post
- telter – letter
-imal – mail
<b>III.New lesson.</b>


Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
<b>1, Presentation ( 12 ms) </b>



<b>a) Pre- teach vocabulary : </b>


- local stamp (n) : tem gửi trong nước
- over seas stamp (n) : tem gửi ra nước
ngoài


- regulary ( adv) : thường xuyên
- phone card (n) : thẻ điện thoại


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal3 times.
Then helps SS to repeat 2 times


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
* Checking by R .O. R


<b>b)- Introduce the dialogue </b>


Call two students and ask them to make
the dialogue at the post office.



Now you look at the picture and answer
the questions:


Where do Hoa and Nga go after school?
What do they want from the post office?
Do you know?


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus &
in individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

Ask the students to guess.( they can speak
by Vietnamese )


If you want to know, you’ll listen to the
conversation between Nga and Hoa.


<b>-</b> @ Play the tape.


Ask students to repeat the tape.


Call on some students to practice in front
of the class.



Listen and correct their mistakes.


Give some words that students didn’t
know:


- local stamps.


- stamps for overseas.
- A phone card.


Play the tape again and have students
role-play it in front of the class again.


Make questions for students:


- What does Hoa need from the
post office?


<b>-</b> Why does she need stamps for
overseas?


- How often does she write the
letters?


- Why does she need a phone
card?


- Does she phone her parents one
a week?



Ask students to compare with their
guessing


<b>2, Practice ( 15 ms ) </b>


@ Ask students to ask and answer the
questions in front of the class.


Listen and correct their mistakes if they
have.


Give the correct answers:


- Hoa needs some local stamps,
some stamps for overseas and a phone
card.


- Because she has a pen pal in
America.


- She writes the letters very
regularly- about once a month.


- Because she phones her parents
once a week.


- Yes, she does.
<b>3, Production ( 10 ms ) </b>


@ Ask students to talk about them.



The first teacher can make questions for
them , then the students make questions and
answer them.


Teacher can give some words that they are
used at the post office.


- envelops, writing pads,


postcards.


Two students go the board and
make the dialogue.


Look at the picture and answer the
questions;


- to the post office.


<b>-</b> They want some stamps.


Listen to the tape and repeat.
Practice in front of the class.
Repeat these words.


Rewrite them into the notebooks.
Role –play the tape.


Listen to the teacher and answer


the teacher’s questions.


Others listen to their answers and
give comments.


Compare with over guessing.


Make questions and answers in
front of the class.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

Ask students to use these words to make
the dialogue.


Listen and correct their mistakes if they
have.




<b>-IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
-Asks Ss to making a dialogue .


<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


- Study the vocabulary & the exchanges .
- Exercise: B3 – P52 Workbook.


- Prepare the vocabulary for the dialogues & the picture on page 84.
-Preparing: Unit 8: B-4



<b>VI.Can improve </b>


……...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1 . Pre – listening ( 10 ms )</b>


a. Pre- teach.


- total ( adj ) tỉng toµn bé
- anyone / anybody ( n) 1 vµi ngời


nào


- stationery store ( n) cưa hàng văn
phòng phẩm


- packet (n ) gói


- - Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects



the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> R.O.R


c.Open prediction.


- T asks Ss to predict the prices of each of
these five items.


Item Price


1 a packet of envelope


2 a pen


3 a writing pad


4 5 stamps


5 a phone card


<b>2 . While-listening.(15ms)</b>


a.T turns on the tape to ask Ss listen the price of


each of these five items and check their


prediction.
*Answer key.


1. 2.000


2. 1.500


3. 3.000


4. 2.500


5. 50.000


total: 59.000dong


b.T asks Ss answer two questions in B4 P85
(text book).


*Answer key.


-the total cost is 59.000 dong
-She will have 1.000 dong in change.
<b> 3 . Post-listening.(13ms)</b>


- write it up


- Listening to the words.



Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.


<b>-</b> Ss predict things Mrs Robinson
needs from


the post office.


- Ss read the table and check their prediction.


<b>-</b> Ss listen the price of each of thesefive
items and check their prediction.


-Ss answer two questions in B4 P85
(text book).


<b>WEEK: 17</b>


Preparing day: 6/12/2010


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

<b>Lesson 5: AT THE POST OFFICE<B4></b>


<b>Period: 49</b>



<b>A. Aims : Help ss to listen to the detials to get further practice in the post office </b>
vocabulary and tell the price



<b>B . Objectives :-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to how to use </b>
post office vocabulary.


<b>I.Knowledge . – Post office vocabulary. </b>
<b>II. Skill . – listening skill. </b>


<b>C .</b>


<b> Ways of working : pw , indi …</b>


<b>D . Materials : picture p 85 , vcd , radio . </b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems :Ss may have difficulty in listening B4 . T can help ss </b>
to predict before listening .


<b>F . Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision(5ms)</b>
<b>-</b> “Matching”


Matching a part of word in column A with a part of word in column B to
make a rihgt word.


post velope
Ame ge
en phone
sta ter


chan card
tele mp
let rica
post office
<b>III.New lesson.</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1 . Pre – listening ( 10 ms )</b>


a. Pre- teach.


- total ( adj ) tỉng toµn bé
- anyone / anybody ( n) 1 vµi ngi


no


- stationery store ( n) cửa hàng văn
phòng phẩm


- packet (n ) gãi


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


<b>-</b> Listening to the words.
Repeating the words in chorus


& individual.
- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

- - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects


the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> R.O.R


c.Open prediction.


- T asks Ss to predict the prices of each of
these five items.


Item Price


1a packet of envelope


2 a pen


3 a writing pad


4 5 stamps



5 a phone card


<b>2 . While-listening.(15ms)</b>


a.T turns on the tape to ask Ss listen the price
of


each of these five items and check their
prediction.


*Answer key.


6. 2.000


7. 1.500


8. 3.000


9. 2.500


10. 50.000


total: 59.000dong


b.T asks Ss answer two questions in B4 P85
(text book).


*Answer key.


-the total cost is 59.000 dong


-She will have 1.000 dong in change.
<b> 3 . Post-listening.(13ms)</b>


- write it up


<b>-</b> Ss predict things Mrs Robinson
needs from


the post office.


- Ss read the table and check their
prediction.


<b>-</b> Ss listen the price of each of
thesefive


items and check their prediction.


-Ss answer two questions in B4 P85
(text book).


<b> IV Consolidation ( 1ms ) : T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson</b>
<b> V.Homework.(1m) : -Doing exercise : 1,2,3 (B) in the workbook, P.50-52</b>
-Preparing: Review all knowledge from unit 1 to unit 8
<b> VI.Can improve </b>


Preparing s’ day: 7/12/2010


<b>REVIEW</b>


<b>Period: 50 </b>




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

<b>B .</b>


<b> Objectives : By the end of this lesson, students will be able to remind all </b>
knowledge from unit 1 to unit 8.


<b>I.Knowledge : -The future tense</b>


-Future simple tense & Question with “Would..?” & Vocabulary.
<b>II. Skill : - Reading and speaking drill .</b>


<b>C .</b>


<b> Ways of wooorking : T – wc pw , gw , indi …</b>
<b>D </b>


<b> . Materials : Ss’ books , chalk ,board .</b>
<b>E </b>


<b> . Anticipated problems : There arenot any problems in this period . </b>
<b>F . Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting </b>
<b> II Revision</b>
<b>III.New lesson.</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1.PRESENTATION(15ms)</b>


<b>Shark attack:</b>



- Introduces the game & explains the way to
play & divides the class into 2 groups to play
the game.


<i><b>- </b></i>Helps Ss toplay the game.
- Corrects & comments.


<b>2.PRACTICE(20ms)</b>


-Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to give
the form & use of the future simple tense then
work in pairs to write things they will do or
will not do tomorrow.


<b>* Form</b><i><b>: S + Will/shall + V.</b></i>


<b>* Use</b><i><b>: Talk about things will do in the</b></i>
<i><b>future</b></i>.


- Asks Ss to compare the keys.
-Asks Ss to practice in pairs.
- Corrects & comments.


<b>Word cue drill: A1/ P19-20.</b>


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.


- Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss


to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


 Cues:


<i>-go to the movie /☺</i>
<i>-go shopping /☺</i>
<i>-listen to music /☻</i>
<i>- go out for dinner /☺</i>
<i>-play video games /☻</i>


<b>3.PRODUCTION(8ms)</b>


- Playing the game in 2 groups.
- Commenting the game.


* The words for the game:


<i> 1. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _</i>
<i>(Television).</i>


<i> 2. _ _ _ _ _ (chair).</i>
<i> 3. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (Picture).</i>
<i> 4. _ _ _ _ _ _ (Stove).</i>


<i> 5. _ _ _ _ _ (Table)</i>


<b>- Giving the form & use of the</b>
future simple tense.


- Working in pairs to write
things will do or will not do
tomorrow.


- Comparing the keys & give
the keys by practicing in pairs.
- Correcting the keys.


<i>I will see a movie but he won t</i>’


<i>watch TV. He will write to his</i>
<i>grandmother but he won t</i>’


<i>meet Minh. </i>


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in
individual.


- Making sentences for the next
cues.


- Practicing in groups & in pairs
.


- Correcting the pronunciation.


* Example exchange:


<i>S1: Would you like to go for a</i>
<i>walk ?</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

- Asks Ss the questions & requires them to
answer.


- Corrects S’s answers & comments.
* Questions:


a. What time do your classes start ?
b. What time do they finish ?


c. How many lessons do you have on Mondays
?


d. How many hours do you do your homework
?


e. When will you have a vacation ?
f. How long does your vacation last ?


<i>- </i>Answering the questions.
-Correcting the pronunciation.


<i>a. My classes start at 7.00.</i>
<i>b. They finish at 11.15.</i>


<i>c. I have five lessons on</i>


<i>Monday.</i>


<i>d. It takes two hour for me to</i>
<i>do my home work .</i>


<i>e. I will have a vacation in</i>
<i>June.</i>


f. It will last in three months<i>.</i>


<b>IV. Consolidation.(1m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


-Doing again all exercises in your notebook.
-Preparing: review 2


<b>VI . Can improve:</b>


…...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

Preparing s’ day: 11/12/2009


<b>REVIEW</b>


<b>Period: 51 </b>


<b>A . Aims : Help ss to review The present simple.</b>


<b>B . Objectives : -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate </b>
the knowledge .


<b>I.Knowledge. –The present simple.</b>
<b>II. Skill : -Reading and speaking drill.</b>
<b>C .</b>


<b> Ways of wooorking : T – wc pw , gw , indi …</b>
<b>D </b>


<b> . Materials : Ss’ books , chalk ,board .</b>
<b>E </b>


<b> . Anticipated problems : There arenot any problems in this period . </b>
<b>F . Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting</b>
<b>II- Revision.</b>


<b> III. New lesson</b>


Teacher’s activities

Students’activities



<b>1. Present simple tense.</b>
a. With (to) be 10ms)


-T asks ss to remember the way to use the
structure,use.



-T calls some ss to go to the board and write.
-T controls and corrects with ss.


-T asks Ss to give the structures and the way
to use them.


Structure:


Khẳng định: S + (to) be +(a/an) + O.
Phủ định: S + (to) be-not +(a/an) + O.
Nghi vấnto) be + S +a/an + O ?.
Trả lời: Yes, S + (to)be


No, S + (to) be-not
-T asks ss to give more example


<i>.Example:</i>


1.They are students.
2.He isnot an engineer.
3. Are they students ?
Yes, they are.
No, they aren’t
T controls and corrects.
Notes:


I + am


She,He,It + is



You, They, We + are
<b>2.Exercise: (10ms)</b>


. Put the verbs in the correct answer:


- Introduces the way to practice & devides
the class into 2 groups to practice.


- Helps Ss to practice.


-Calls ss to go to the board write the answer.
- Corrects & comments


1. She…...(to)be not ) a student.
2…...she a good student ? ((to) be)
3. I…...a farmer. ((to)be)


4. They…...nurses. ((to)be)


-Ss remember and answer the
question of teacher.


-Ss give examples.
+ He is a teacher.
+ Nam isnot a student.
+ Is she tall?


Yes, she is/ No, she isn’t.
…etc



<b>-</b> Ss take notes.


<b>-</b> Ss copy the notes and learn
by heart.


-Ss work individual then share
with your partners.


Expected:


1.She isn’t a student.
2.Is she a good student?
3. I’m a farmer.


4.They are nurses.


5.Mr.Nam and Mrs.Nga aren’t
workers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

5. Mr.Nam andMrs. Nga…...
workers. ((to)be-not)


- Correcting the answer keys.


<b>2. Present simple tense.(10ms)</b>
a. With regular verbs.


-T asks ss to remember the way to use the
structure,use.



-T calls some ss to go to the board and write.
-T controls and corrects with ss.


-T asks Ss to give the structures and the way
to use them.


Structure:


Khẳng định: S + V(s/es) + O.


Phủ định: S + don’t/doesn’t + V(inf) + O.
Nghi vấn: Do/ Does + S + V(inf) + O ?.
Trả lời: Yes, S + do/does


No, S + don’t/ doesn’t.
-T asks ss to give more example


<i>b.Example:</i>


1.They play chess.


2.He works in a hospital.
3. Does nam like oranges?
Yes, he does


No, he doesn’t.
T controls and corrects.
Notes:


She,He,It + V(s/es)


You, They, We + V(inf)
<b>2.Exercise: (10ms)</b>


a.Put the following verbs in simple presnt.
-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the
exercises.


-T asks ss the way to do.


- T calls ss to go to the board write the
answer.


-T comment and correct.


1. The swimming bath…...(open) at
9:00 and …...(close) at 18:30 every day.
2.I have a car but I…...(not-use) it
very often.


3.I…...(play) the piano, but
I…...(not-play) very well.
4.I don’t understand the word”decide”.
What…...(“decide”/ mean)?


5.I …...(work) in a bank.
Nam…...(work) in an office.


-Ss remember and answer the
question of teacher.



-Ss give examples.


+ He teaches in a school..
+ Nam doesn’t play volleyball..
+ Do you want to learn English?
Yes, I do/ No,I don’t.


…etc


<b>-</b> Ss take notes.


<b>-</b> Ss copy the notes and learn
by heart.


Practicing in groups.
-Expected:


1. opens…...closes
2.don’t use


3.play…...don’t play.
4.does the “decide” mean?
5.work…...doesn’t work…...
-Ss go to the board write the
answer.


- Correcting the answer keys.


<b>IV. Consolidation.(3ms)</b>




-T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check.



<b>V.Homework</b>

.(2ms)



-Preparing the simple present tense .


-Preparing the present progressive tense .



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

…...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

<b>WEEK: 18</b>


Preparing s’ day: 12/12/2009


<b>REVIEW</b>


<b>Period: 52 </b>



<b>A . Aims : Help ss to review The present progressive tense , Adjectives and </b>
adverbs , Prepositions.


<b>B . Objectives : -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to remind all </b>
knowledge from unit 1 to unit 8.


<b>I.Knowledge. –The present progressive tense, -Adjectives and adverbs</b>
-Prepositions.


<b>III. Skill . – Reading and speaking drill.</b>
.



<b>C .</b>


<b> Ways of wooorking : -posters, card, book, workbook</b>
<b>D </b>


<b> . Materials : Ss’ books , chalk ,board .</b>
<b>E </b>


<b> . Anticipated problems : There arenot any problems in this period . </b>
<b>F . Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting </b>
<b>II- Revision</b>
<b>III.New lesson.</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<i><b>1. The present progressive tense.</b></i>
<i><b>(15ms)</b></i>


T asks Ss to remind.
*Answer key.


S + (to)be + V-ing + O.
S + (to)be-not + V-ing + O.
(To)Be + S + V-ing + O ?
Ex:


S1:What is he doing?


S2: He is playing football.
-“Word cue drill”


a)Lan/walk to school


b)They/go to school by bus.
c)We/play computer game.
d)She/travel to work.


e)He/sing a song.
Ex:


S1: What is Lan doing?
S2: She is walking to school.
…..etc


<i><b>2. Adjectives.(10ms)</b></i>


T asks Ss to show the way to use &
structure (short adjectives and long
adjectives).


Ex:


1)Lan is taller than Hoa.
Mai is the tallest.


2)This pen is more expensive than that
pen.



The dress “C” is the most expensive.
-“picture drill” (T asks Ss depend on ex
5 P.40 in text book).


Ex:


-A toy is cheaper than a ball.
-A ball is cheaper than a car.


-Ss renind and show the way to give
the use and the structure.


-Take notes.
-Ss practice well.


-Ss show the way to use & structure
(short adjectives and long adjectives).


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

-A toy is the cheapest.
…..etc.


<i><b>3. Adverbs of frequency.(10ms)</b></i>


-Exercise 5 P.71 (text book)
Ex:


Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunch
time.


…...etc



T controls and corrects.


<i><b>4. Prepositions(5ms)</b></i>


-Exercise4 P.39 (text book)


-Ss renind and show the way to give
the use and the structure.


-Ss practice well.


-Ss renind and show the way to give
the use and the structure.


-Ss practice well.
<b>IV. Consolidation.(3ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework.(2ms)</b>


-Doing exercise :


-Preparing: -Preposition of place; Must & Can; Question words.
-Yes / No question with Present progressive


<b>VI . Can improve :</b>


…...
...


...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

Preparing s’ day: 15/12/2009


<b>REVIEW</b>


<b>Period: 53</b>



<b>A . Aims : -Helps Ss to further practice in Preposition of place; Must & Can; </b>
Question words & Yes / No question with Present progressive.


<b> B . Objectives . By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use these grammars </b>
completely .


<b>I.Knowledge. –Preposition of place; Must & Can; Question words.</b>
-Yes / No question with Present progressive


<b>III. Skill . – Reading and speaking drill. </b>
<b>C .</b>


<b> Ways of wooorking : -posters, card, book, workbook</b>
<b>D </b>


<b> . Materials : Ss’ books , chalk ,board .</b>
<b>E </b>


<b> . Anticipated problems : There arenot any problems in this period</b>
<b>F . Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision</b>
III.New lesson.
<b>Teacher s</b>’


<b>activities</b> <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>I.PRESEN</b>


<b>TATION(</b>
<b>15ms)</b>
1. Yes/ No
question of
Present
progressive


-Introduces
the


dialogue &
helps Ss to
practice in
chorus.
- Asks Ss
to practice
the


dialogue in
groups &
in pairs.
- Check S’s


practicing
the


dialogue in
groups &
in pairs.


-Corrects
the


pronunci
ation &
commen


* Mapped
dialogue:
- Practicing
the


dialogue in
chorus; in
groups &
in pairs.
- Corrects
the
pronunciati
on &
comments.
* *


Example
exchanges:
S1: Are
you


watching
TV ?.


S2: No,
I’m not.
S1: Are
you


listening to
the radio ?
S2: No,
I’m not.
S1: Are
you


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

ts.


… TV ?
… radio ?


reading ?


What ….?
2.



Preposition
of place:
* Listen &
Draw:
- Reads the
text &
Asks Ss to
listen to
the text &
draw the
position of
things that
they hear.
- Reads the
text again
& Asks Ss
to compare
& give the
picture
they drew.
- Corrects
&


comments.
* “There is
a house.
Behind the
house there
are



mountains.
To the left
of the
house there
is a tree. In
front of the
house there
is a river.
To the right
of the
house a
man is
riding a
bike.”


doing ?
S2: I’m
playing
video
games.


-Working
in pairs to
look at the
picture &


use the


Preposition


of place in
the box to
complete
the


paragraph.
-


Comparing
the keys &
give the
keys.


II.PRACTI
CE(10ms)
2. Question
words: -
Grid.


- Practicing in groups, using the past simple to talk about their
vacation.


- Giving the answers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>



-Introduces
the topic &
asks Ss to
practice in


groups,
using the
past simple


to talk


about their
vacation.
- Asks Ss
to give the
answers.
- Corrects
S’s


pronunciati
on &
comments.
* Example
exchanges:


S
1
:
W
h
a
t
i
s
h


i
s
n
a
m
e
?
.
S
2
:
J
o
h
n
.
S
1
:
H
o
w
o
l
d
i
s


S1: Where does he live ?.
S2: In Hue.



S1: What time does he get up ?.
S2: Five-thirty..


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

h
e
?
S
2
:
H
e
i
s
t
h
i
r
t
y

-f
i
v
e
..
S
1
:
W


h
a
t
d
o
e
s
h
e
d
o
?
.
S
2
:
H
o
e
i
s
a
t
e
a
c
h
e
r.



John 35 Teacher Hue 05.30 13.00


Hoa 21 Farmer Ha


Tinh 04.00 18.00


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

<b>III.PROD</b>
<b>UCTION(</b>
<b>10ms)</b>
<b>3. Must & </b>
<b>Can:</b>


Noughts
& Crosses:


-Introduces
the


example
exchange
& helps Ss
to work in
groups to
answer the
questions
about the
road signs
with Must
& Can.


- Asks Ss
to compare
the keys.
- Corrects
&


comments
the game.
* Example:
S1:
What does
this sign
mean ?


<i> S2:</i>
<i>You [ must</i>
<i>slow</i>


<i>down ].</i>
<i>[ can park</i>
<i>here ].</i>


<b>-Working in groups to answer the questions about the road signs</b>
with Must & Can.


- Comparing the keys.
- Correcting the keys.


<b>IV. Consolidation.(3ms)</b>



-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework.(2ms)</b>


- Study the grammar & the modal sentence & do the exercises at home.
-Preparing: written test (The first term examination)


<b>VI.Can improve :</b>


<b>THE FIRST TERM EXAMINATION</b>


<b>(</b>

<b>Period:54)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

<b>WEEK: 19</b>


Preparing ’s day: 2/1/2011


<b>Unit 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY</b>



<b>Lesson 1: A holiday in Nha Trang <A1> P.86-87</b>


<b>Period: 55</b>



<b>A . Aims : Help ss to talk about vacation and know some regular and iregular </b>
verbs in the past simple tense .


<b>B . Objectives : By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about </b>
vacation.


<b> I.Knowledge. – The simple past.</b>
<b> II. Skill . Listening and speaking .</b>
<b>C </b>



<b> . Materials : Vcd , radio , picture p 86 ordreing statements .</b>
<b>D . Ways of working : T –wc , pairs work , indi .. . </b>


<b>E . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in using the past simple </b>
tense . T can explain carefully .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision(3ms)</b>


<b>-</b> “Jumpled words”


notivaca=? Answer key: (vacation,wonderful,visit,take,buy)
wofulnder=?


Tisvi=?
Ktae=?
Yub=?


<b>III.New lesson.</b>


Teacher’s activities Students’activities
<b>1. Presentation.(12ms)</b>


a.<i><b>Pre teach</b></i>.


-aquarium (n) picture : hồ c¸


-gift (n) explaination : = present :quµ


-trip (n) explaination : chuyÕn ®i


-(to) return translation : trë l¹i
- delicous ( adj ) translation ngon
miƯng


- wonderful ( adj ) ) explaination TuyÖt
vêi




- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation &
gives example.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.


<i><b>b.Checking vocab.</b></i>


<b>-</b> R.O.R



<i><b>c.Presentation dialogue.</b></i>


<b>-</b> A1 P.86


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue.


- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in


-Ss guess the meaning, pronunciation,
funtion of the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual & Correcting the mistakes
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss play the game well.


-Ss read and take note the main ideas.
- Practicing the dialogue in pairs
-Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>*Model sentence:</b>


<i><b>The people were friendly.</b></i>
<i><b>The food was delicious.</b></i>
<i><b>I visited Cham temple.</b></i>


<i><b>I bought a lot of gifts.</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


- Introduces the model sentence &
explains the form & use of the past
simple tense:


<i><b>d.Model senrences.</b></i>


T sets a sence to give the model
sentences.


The people were friendly
The food was delicious
I visited Cham temples
I bought a lot of gifts


<b>2. Practice.(20ms)</b>


T asks Ss to match the infinitives with
the verbs in the simple past tense.


- Introduces model sentences &
the drill & helps Ss to practice by
substitute the drill.



- Practices with Ss then checks
their practicing in pairs.


<i><b>- </b></i>Corrects S’s substitution & comments
be visited


have was/were
buy had
take took
return bouhgt


<i><b>Substitution drill</b></i>


“ ”


1)have a good time
2)visit Cham Temple


3)take him to the movie theater
4)buy some gifts


5)return to Hue
Example exchange:
T: have a good time
Ss: We had a good time


<b>3. Production(8ms)</b>


-Do exercise A2 P.53 (a-i) in the work
book.( Using a game Noughts and


Crosses” ).


<b> Visit + ed = visited</b>
<b>*- V-e + d </b>


- qui t¾c 1- 1- 1
- V –y =V- ied


* Pronunciation : “- ed “ 3 ways :
- /t/ khi “ed” đứng sau các âm vô
thanh : typed , looked , dressed ,
brushed , watch …


- /d / khi “ ed “ đứng sau các âm hữu
thanh : opened , close , lived , ofered,
played …


- /id / khi “ ed “ đứng sau các động từ
tận cùng là ‘t / d ‘ : wanted , needed ,
posted , decided …


-Ss give the concept check.


-Ss match the infinitives with the verbs
in the simple past tense.


*Steps of drill: Teacher- class –open
pairs- closed pairs.


<i><b>- </b></i>Practicing in pairs by substitute the


drill.


-Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>* Model sentences:</b>


<i><b>T: have a good time.</b></i>
<i><b>Ss: We had a good time.</b></i>


<b>-</b> Answer:


1. We had a good time
2. We visited Cham temple.


3. We took him to the movie theater.
4. We bought some gifts.


We returned to Hue.


- Practicing in groups, using the past
simple to talk about their vacation.
- Giving the answers.


- Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


- Study the vocabularies & the model sentences by heart .



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

- Prepare the vocabulary for the text on page 87 & the pictures on page 88.
-Preparing: Unit 9: A2


<b>G .Can improve</b>


…...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

Preparing’s day: 02/01/2011


<b>Unit 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY</b>



<b>Lesson2: A holiday in Nha Trang <A2> P.87-88</b>


<b>Period: 56</b>



<b>A . Aims : Help ss to read the text for main idea , and details and creature seas </b>
vocabulary .


<b>B . Objectives . –By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand </b>
the details about The Robinson’s trip to Tri Nguyen aquarium.


<b>I.Knowledge. </b>– The Robinson’s trip to Tri Nguyen aquarium.
<b>-</b> The simple past.


<b>II. Skill . – Reading skill. </b>


<b>C . Materials : Vcd , radio , picture p 88 , wordsquare , T/ F statements .</b>
D . Ways of working : T –wc , pw , indi….



<b> E . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in writing about picture page</b>
87 . T can help them with cue- words .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>-II- Revision(3ms)</b>
<b>-</b> “Pelmanism”


eat go see think have buy wear
went ate bought had wore thought saw
III.New lesson.


Teacher’s activities Students’activities
<b>1. Pre-reading.(15ms)</b>


a.Pre-teach.


-a shark ( n) picture c¸ mËp
-a dolphin (n) ) picture c¸ heo
-a turtle ( n) ) picture rïa biÓn
-a crab ( n) ) picture con cua
-a cap ( n) ) picture mị lìi chai


-a poster ( n) ) picture biÓn treo , tranh
treo .


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation & gives
example.



- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Check vocab.


“Matching”
c.Prediction.


-T asks Ss to label the pictures on the P.88
( text book).


d.Presentation text: A2/P87.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
text.


Ss guess the meaning, pronunciation,
funtion of the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual & Correcting the mistakes
- Giving the meaning & the


pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss play the game well.


-Ss label the pictures on the P.88 ( text
book).


- Working in pairs to label for them.
- Comparing & give their labels.


<i><b>- </b></i>Correcting the labeling.
- Listening to the text.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

- Asks Ss to read the text in silence.
- Asks Ss to read the text aloud.
- Asks Ss to check their labeling.


Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
<b>2. While-reading.(17ms)</b>


*-T asks Ss to read the text and check their
ideas.


*Wh – questions.


A2 – P.88 a – f – text book


- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to


work in pairs to read the text then answer
the questions.


- Asks Ss to give the answer keys.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
* Questions:


a. Who went to the aquarium with Liz ?
b. What did the Robinson see there ?
c. What did they buy in the souvenir
shop ?


d. Did Liz like the cap? Which sentence
tell you this ?


e. Do Mr. & Mrs. Robinson like to eat
seafood ?


f. Why did Liz eat noodles for lunch ?
<b>3.Post </b>–<b> reading(7ms)</b>


-Tell the story of Liz’s trip Tri Nguyen
aquarium (using pictures P.88 text book)
-T corrects the mistakes.


-Ss read the text and check their ideas.
*Answer key.


a).going to the aquarium.



b)seeingsharks,dolphins,turtles,and
many colorful fish.


c)sourvenir shop.
d)buying a cap


e)eating fish and crabs


- Working in pairs to read the text then
answer the questions.


- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting


* Answer:


a. Her parents went to the aquarium
with her.


b. They saw sharks, dolphins, turtles, &
many colorful fish.


c. They bought Liz a cap & a poster.
d. Yes, she did. She wore it all day.
e. Yes, they do. They ate fish & craps.
f. Because she remember the beautiful
fish in the aquarium & she likes them.
```````````3`



-Ss using the pictures to tell the story of
Liz’s trip Tri Nguyen aquarium .


-Ss work individually.
* Example:


I and my parents went to Tri Nguyen …
-Take notes.


<b>IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V.Homework.(1m)</b>


- Study the vocabularies by heart .


-Writing a short story talking about what you did on your vacation.
- Prepare the vocabulary for the text on page 89.


-Preparing: Unit 9: A3
<b>G .Can improve</b>


…...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

Preparing’s day: 03/01/2011


<b>Unit 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY</b>




<b>Lesson 3: A holiday in Nha Trang <A3 -4 </b>

<b> 5 ></b>


<b>Period: 57</b>



<b>A . Aims : Help ss to develop listening and reading skill . Through out the tape </b>
about the trip of Liz ’ s family to Nha Trang and Ba’s daily.


<b>B . Objectives . By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the </b>
details about The Robinson’s trip to Tri Nguyen aquarium and Ba’s daily.


<b> I.Knowledge. The Robinson’s trip to Tri Nguyen aquarium and Ba’s </b>
daily. .


<b>-</b> The simple past.
<b>II. Skill . – Reading skill.</b>
<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , radio , ss’ books …</b>


<b>D . Ways of working : T-wc , pw , gw , indi…</b>


<b>E . Anticipated problems : Ss have difficulty in listening A3 .T can help ss to </b>
guess before listening .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>-II- Revision(5ms)</b>
-A1 P.53 (work book)
<b>III.New lesson.</b>



TEACHER’S WORKS STUDENT’S WORKS


A A3 ( 20ms )


I.PRE-LISTENING(5ms)


1. True – False prediction: A3 – P89.
- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss
to work in pairs to predict which


statements are true .


- Asks Ss to compare & give their
prediction.


- Comments S’s prediction.
* Statements:


a. The Robinson returned to Hanoi by
train.


b. The Robinson returned to Hanoi by
bus


c. This was the second times Liz saw the
paddies. D. This was the first times Liz
saw the paddies.


e. They stopped at the restaurant for a
short time.



f. They stopped at the restaurant for a
long time.


g. Mr. Robinson bought some food for
Liz.


h. Mrs. Robinson bought some food for
Liz


i. They arrived home in the afternoon.
j. They arrived home in the evening.


- Working in pairs to predict which
statements are true .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

II.WHILE-LISTENING(10ms)


2. Presentation text: (Teacher’s book).
- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
text.


- Asks Ss to listen to the text & get the
idea.


- Asks Ss to check their prediction.
- Corrects S’s prediction & comments.


- Listening to the text & get the idea.
- Listening to the text & check the


prediction.


Answer keys:


<b>-</b> True statements: b – d – e – h
– i.


TAPE TRANSCRIPT : A3 p89


The Robinson had a great holiday in Nha Trang. Unfortunately, the holiday soon
ended and it was time to return to home. They took a bus back to Hanoi. Liz was
excited as the bus drove through the countryside. She saw rice paddies for the first
time. Everything looked calm and peaceful. At four o’clock, the bus stopped at a
small roadside restaurant for ten minutes. Mr. Robinson was asleep, so Mrs.
Robinson bought some peanut and an ice-cream for Liz. The bus arrived in Hanoi at
about 7.00.


III.POST-LISTENING(5ms)
3. Complete the text:


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss
to work in pairs to use the past form of
the given verb to complete the text.
- Asks Ss to compare & give their
answers.


- Corrects & comments.


- Working in pairs to use the past form of
the given verb to complete the text.



- Comparing & give their answers.
- Correcting the answer keys.
* Answer keys:


1. had 2. ended 3. was
4. took 5. was 6. drove
7. saw 8. looked 9. bought
10. arrived


take – end – be – have – drive
arrive – see – look – stop – buy.


The Robinson (1) ……… a great holiday in Nha Trang. Unfortunately, the holiday
soon (2)……… and it (3) …… … time to return to home. They (4) ……… a bus
back to Hanoi. Liz (5)……… excited as the bus (6)……… through the
countryside. She (7)……… rice paddies for the first time. Everything (8)………
calm and peaceful. At four o’clock, the bus (9) ……… at a small roadside
restaurant for ten minutes. Mr. Robinson was asleep, so Mrs. Robinson (10)………
some peanut and an ice-cream for Liz. The bus (11)……… in Hanoi at about 7.00.


<b>B. A4( 17 )</b>


<b>I.Pre </b>–<b> reading (5ms)</b>
<b>1, pre </b>–<b> teach:</b>


* Teacher elicits to teach vocab


<b>-</b> (to) rent : explanation



<b>-</b> (to) keep in touch : traslation


<b>-</b> (to) teach : example


<b>-</b> (to) improve : translation


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times
). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &


<b>-</b> Students guess the words listen &
repeat.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2, checking vocab matching</b>‘ ’



-Divides the words & the meaning into
two columns & asks Ss to work in
individual to match the meaning to the
words & Corrects


- rent - taught
- keep - tented
- teach - kept
- improven - received
- receive - improved
<b>3, T / F statement prediction</b>


- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to
work in pairs to predict which statements
are true or false.


- Asks Ss to give the keys & Comments.
<b>1.</b> Liz lived a long way from Ba.


<b>2.</b> Liz learned VietNamese in the USA.
<b>3.</b> Ba collects stamps.


<b>4.</b> Liz’s aunt lives in NewYork.


<b>5.</b> The Robisons moved to HCM city.
<b>6.</b> The Robisons moved now Ba is


happy.



<b>7.</b> Ba will see Liz next week.
<b>I.</b> <b>While learning(10ms)</b>
* Teacher asks students to read.


 Answer key :


1. F 5. F
2. F 6. F
3. T 7. T
4.T – T corrects


<b>II.</b> <b>Post reading(2ms)</b>


-Teacher asks students do Ex3 P54 in
Unit 9 in work book.


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to write the question &
give answer with YES or NO.


- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys.
- Corrects & comments.


* Answer keys;


a. Did his uncle take him to see Cham
Temple ? – No, he didn’t.


b. Did Liz buy a lot of souvenirs ? –
Yes, she did.



c. Did they put the fish in the bags ? –
No, they didn’t.


d. Did Liz teach Ba some English ? –
Yes, she did.


<b>-</b> Copy down.


<b>-</b> Students match the word in simple
present with a word in simple past.
*Answer keys:


<i>* rent </i>
<i>* keep</i>
<i><b>* teach</b></i>
<i><b>* improve</b></i>
<i><b>* receive</b></i>


<i>* rented </i>
<i>* kept</i>
<i><b>* taught</b></i>
<i><b>* improved </b></i>
<i><b>* received </b></i>


<b>-</b> Students predict which statements are
true and which statements are false.


<b>-</b> Students read & check their



predictions and make the wrong sentence
true.


<b>-</b> Take note.


<b>-</b> Students play well.


-Working in pairs to write the question &
give answer with YES or NO.


- Comparing & giving the keys.


<b>IV. Consolidation : (3ms)</b>


- Teacher asks students to speaks again the main of this content .


<b>-</b> <b>Homework </b><b>2ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

- Learing the way to use simple past .
- Preparing Unit 9 Lesson 4 B 1 2 .
G .Can improve


…...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

<b>WEEK: 20</b>


Preparing’s day: 9/01/2011



<b>Unit 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY</b>


<b>Lesson 4: B . NEIGHBORS <B1-2></b>



<b>Period: 58</b>



<b>A . Aims : Help ss describe the characteristics of friends and neighbors . </b>


<b>B. Objectives . –By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the</b>
details about Hoa .


<b>I.Knowledge. – Hoa ‘s daily. </b>


- The simple past . Yes / No questions .
<b>II. Skill . – Reading skill .</b>


<b>C.</b>


<b> Materials : Vcd , radio , picture p92 , given answer </b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T –wc ,pw , gw , indi…</b>
<b>E </b>


<b> . Anticipated prblems : There are not any problems in this period . </b>
<b>F . Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting sing a song -</b>“ ”
<b>II- Revision(5ms)</b>


<b>-</b> “Slap the board”



went took saw
bought ate thought
<b>III.New lesson.( 36 ms) </b>


Teacher’s activities Students’ activities


<b>1.Presentation</b>
*Pre-teach vocabs .
-Elicits the words.
-Models


-Asks Ss to repeat chorally then
individually.


-Listens and checks pronunciation
mistakes


<b>*Checking vocabs: R&R</b>
*Presentation dialouge.
B1.P92-93


-Sets the scene.


-Lets students listen to the CD.
-Asks them to repeat.


-Asks Ss to practice reading the
dialogue in pairs



*Asks Ss to read and answer the
questions from a),b)


<b>-Write the words in the b.b</b>


-Listen,repeat,copy.


-a hairdresser:ngời thợ cắt tóc
- a dress maker : ngêi thỵ may
-neighbor : ngời hàng xóm
- material (n) : vải, chất liệu
- clever (a):th«ng minh


-listen


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

-Listens ,gives feedback
* Model sentences:
-Give the sentences
-Models


<b> 2.Practice</b>
*Grid


-Teacher say: You practice in pairs
,ask answer about the dedail of
the dailogue,using the information
in the grid.


Example:



+S1:Did Hoa buy the material?
S2: No ,she didn’t.


+S1:Did Hoa’s neighbor buy the
material?


S2:Yes ,she did.
<b> </b>
<b>3.Production</b>


<i><b>Guessing game</b></i>


Asks Ss to like a sentence like the
one on the board.


“Yesterday I went to the market
and buy a/an…..’’


-Has Ss not let their partner see
their sentences


-Asks Ss to ask the question
beginning with ‘’Did you buy
(a/an)…....?’’to predic


-Read the dailogue and answer the
questions.


-Work individually then pair-compare.
-Give answer before class.



-Answer key:


a.She is a hairdresser.
b.She’s a dressmaker.
-Listen,repeat


-Copy.


+ Did Hoa buy the dress?
No,she didn’t.


+Did her aunt cut her hair ?
Yes ,she did.


-Listen to the teacher .
-Ask and answer in pairs.


Thing to do Hoa Hoa’s


neighbor Hoa’saunt


buy the material x v x


cut her hair x x v


make the dress x v x


buy the dress x x x



Write the sentence
-Play the game .
-example:


+T’sentence: Yesterday I went to the market
and buy a pen”


+S1:Did you buy a book?
+T:No,I didn’t


S2:did you buy a pen?
+T:Yes I did .


(S2 goes to the b.b and do the same as the
teacher )


<b>IV.Consolidation : (2ms)</b>


_ Sum up the lesson.
<b>V.Homework : (2ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

………


………


………



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

Peparing’s day: 10/01/2011


<b>Unit 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY</b>


<b>Lesson 5: NEIGHBORS <B3-4></b>




<b>Period: 59</b>



<b>A . Aims : Help ss to talk about hobbies and discribe a process . </b>


<b> B . Objectives : -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about </b>
hobbies and discribe a process .


<b>I.Knowledge. The simple past with irregular verbs . </b>
<b>II. Skill . – Reading and speaking skill.</b>


<b>C .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T – wc , pw , indi .. </b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Materials : picture p 93 , ss’ books , word cue drill .</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> A nticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in answering the questions in</b>
B3 . T can explain the question .


<b>F . Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting</b>
<b>II- Revision</b>


<b>-</b> “Pelmanism”(2ms)


help take talk go give see


helped took talked went gave saw



<b>III.New lesson. ( 38 ms ) </b>


Teacher’s activities Students’ activities
<b>1.pre-reading ( 8ms )</b>


-Introduces the text
* Pre – teach vocab.
-Elicits the words.
-Models


-Asks Ss to repeat chorally then
individually.


-Listens and checks pronunciation
mistakes


*Checking vocabs: Matching
*Ordering.


- Asks Sts to read the sentences then
predict the order


-Give the prediction.


<b> 2.While reading ( 20 ms ) </b>
*Reading and checking


-Asks Ss to red and check their
prediction .



-Has them give the correct order.
* Comprehension questions


-Asks Ss to read the dialogue again and
answer the questions in pairs


-Check by the game :Noughts and
Crosses


a b c




- Listen


-Listen,repeat,copy
- (to) sew : may v¸


 sewing machine : m¸y may
- useful (a): cã Ých


- hobby (n) : sở thích
-(to) decide : quyết định
- a cushion :chiếc đệm gối
- a skirt: chiếc váy ngắn
- (to) try : thử


try sth on  I try this dress on
- (to) fit : võa vỈn



-Read and predict
-Give prediction


a, First,She made a cushion for her
armchair


first


b,Next, she made a skirt.
C,Hoa bought some material.
D,Hoa’ neighbor helped her
e, She tried it on but it didn’t fit
f, Finally, It fitted very well.
G,It was too big.


-Read and check their
prediction--Give answer .


Answer key:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

d e f


g h i


3. Post reading ( 10ms )


B4.(P94).Write. Put the verbs brackets
in the simple past.



-Asks Ss to do the excise


-Has them to give answer on the b.b


-Pair-work
-Team-work
Answer key


a. She learn how to use a sewing
machine .


b. She made a cushion for her armchair
c. It was blue and while.


d. She made a skirt next.


e. It was green with while flowers on it
f. It looked pretty.


g. It was too big.


h. Her neighbor, Mrs. Mai, helped her.
i. It fittedvery well


-Put the verbs brackets in the simple
past.


-Work individually then pair compare.
-Give answer before class .



Keys :


1. watched.. 2. bought
3. cut 4., used
5. decided ,was 6. made , was
,wasn’t.


7. helped
-Listen


-Listen and write down
<b>IV.Consolidation </b><b>3m)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
<b>V.Homework </b><b>2ms)</b>


<b>-</b> Doing exercise 5 in work book.


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all vocab + words in simple past.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson : Unit 9 Lesson 6: Grammar practice
<b>G .Canimprove</b>


<i><b>-</b></i> …...


... THE END
Preparing’s day: 11/01/2011


<b>LANGUAGE FOCUS 3</b>


<b>Period: 60</b>




<b>A . Aims : To help ss to consolidate grammar from unit 7 to unit 9 </b>


<b>B . Objectives :-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to remind the </b>
knowledge from unit 8 to unit 9.


<b>I.Knowledge. </b>– The simple past
- Making suggestions.
- more, less and fewer (*)


<b>II. Skill . – Reading and speaking skill .</b>
<b>C.</b>


<b> Materials : Picture p95 , 96 , ss’ books . </b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T –wc , pw , indi … </b>
<b>E </b>


<b> . Anticipated problems : This period is very long , so t get ss to prepare well </b>
at home .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

<b>I.Greeting</b>


<b>II- Revision ( 5ms ) Write irregular verbs in past simple . –</b>
<b>III.New lesson. ( 37 ms ) </b>


Teacher’s activities Students’activities
<b>1. How much is it?(10ms ) </b>



T asks Ss to remind the way to ask and
answer the price.


<b>1)</b> violet dress/ 35.000
<b>2)</b> green hat/ 15.000
<b>3)</b> yellow cap/ 12.000
<b>4)</b> green shirt/ 20.000
<b>5)</b> red shirt/ 22.000
Ex:


S1:How much is the violet dress?
S2:It’s 35.000 dong.


…...etc


<b>2. Preposition. ( 10ms )</b>


T asks Ss to look at the table and ask
and answer with their partners.


<b>From to meter</b>
shoestore minimart
500


clothing store book store
450


restaurant library
400



library shoe store
800


Ex:


S1:How far is it from shoe store to
minimart?


S2:It’s 500 meter.
…...etc


<b>3. The simple past tense.( 17ms)</b>
T gives some words in the simple
present form to ask Ss write them into
the past form.


<b>a) – Introduces the requirement &</b>
asks Ss to work in individual to write
the past form of the verbs in the table.
- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys.
- Corrects & comments.


<b>b) – Introduces the requirement &</b>
asks Ss to work in individual to
complete the sentences using the words
in the box.


- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys.
- Corrects & comments.



* Answer keys:


a)Write the past form of the verbs in
the table.


Verb Past form


Buy Bought


Help Helped


Remember Remembered


Take Took


Send Sent


Think Thought


-Ss remind and answer.


-Take notes.


-Ss practice well.


-SS write the past form of the verbs in
the table.


<i><b>a) </b></i>– Working in individual to write
the past form of the verbs in the table.


- Comparing & giving the keys.


b) – Working in individual to
complete the sentences using the
words in the box.


- Comparing & giving the keys.
* Answer keys:


<b>b) Complete the sentences </b>
<b>using the words in the box.</b>


Play send buy talk
work


a. I played volleyball last week.
b. Yesterday, I talked to my


grandma.


c. Last week, Mom bought me a
new bike.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

Talk Talked
-T corrects the mistake.


I sent a letter to my pen pal last week.
-Ss do the exercise well.


<b>IV.Consolidation </b><b>2ms)</b>



<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
<b>V.Homework </b><b>1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Doing again all exercise in the notebook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson :Unit 10: <A1-4.>
<b>G .Can improve</b>


…...
...
...


. THE END


<b>WEEK: 21</b>



<b>Preparing s day: 15/01/2011</b>’


<b>Unit 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE</b>


<b>Lesson 1: Personal hygiene <A1-4></b>



<b>Period: 61</b>



<b>A . Aims : Help ss to consolidate the present simple tense and the past simple </b>
tense .And know personal hygiene vocabulary .


<b>B . Objectives –By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand </b>
the main ideas and details of this letter.



<b>I.Knowledge. – Activities you do everyday .</b>
<b>II. Skill . – Reading skill .</b>


<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , radio , …</b>


<b>D . Ways of working : T wc , pw , gw , indi ….</b>
<b>E </b>


<b> . Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in questions p100 . T can </b>
explain the meaning of the questions .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting . </b>
<b>II- Revision .</b>
<b>III.New lesson.</b>


Teacher’s activities Students’activities
<b>1. Pre-reading.(15ms)</b>


a.Pre teach.


- hygiene ( n) vệ sinh
-harvest n( n) mùa gặt
-helpful ( a ) hay giúp đỡ
-iron ( v) là ( quần áo )


- take care of yourself (v) tự chăm sóc


- do morming exercise ( v) tËp thĨ dơc
bi s¸ng


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Checking vocab.


<b>-</b> R.O.R


c.Open prediction.



T asks Ss to guess what Hoa’s mother
wants her to do and she wants her not to
do.


Ex:


Do Not do


get up early don’t stay up late


….... …....


<b>2. While-reading.(20ms)</b>
Activity 1:


-T asks Ss to read the letter and check
their ideas.


Activity 2:


<b>-</b> “Wh-questions”


T give a game “shark attack” to ask Ss
practice. A)- d) A1. P.99.


* Questions:


a. Why are Hoa’s parents busy ?
b. Who helps them on the farm ?
c. When will they go to Hanoi ?


d. How is Hoa different now ?


e. What does Hoa’s mother want her to
do & what does she want her not to do ?
Write two list.


<b>3. Post-reading.(7ms)</b>
- A4 P.102 (text book).


- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
work in individual next in pairs & in
groups to complete Hoa’s reply to her
with suitable words.


- Asks Ss to compare the keys give the
keys.


- Comments.


- Copying the words.
-Ss enjoy the game.


<b>-</b> Ss guess what Hoa’s mother
wants her to do and she wants
her not to do.


<b>-</b> Ss read the letter and check
their ideas.


<b>-</b> Ss enjoy the game.


* Answer:


a. Because it’s nearly harvest time.
b. Hoa’s grandfather helps them on
the farm.


c. They probably go to Hanoi after
the harvest.


d. She gets up early & take morning
exercises.


e. She wants Hoa to wash & iron
her own clothes. She doesn’t want
her to eat too much candy & stay
up late.- Ss work individually- in
pairs- in groups.


- Working in individual next in pairs
& in groups to complete Hoa’s reply
to her with suitable words.


- Asks Ss to compare the keys give
the keys.


* Answer key:


<i>was – having – take – take – get – </i>
<i>go – wash – iron – eating – told – </i>
<i>go.</i>



<b>IV.Consolidation </b><b>2ms)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
<b>V.Homework </b><b>1m)</b>


-Writing a short reply letter to your parents to talk about what you do & about
what you not do.


- Prepare the vocabulary & the picture on page 76 .
-Preparing new lesson :Unit 10: <A 2>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

…...
...
.


THE END
Preparing’s day: 16/01/2011


<b>Unit 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE</b>


<b>Lesson 2: Personal hygiene <A2></b>



<b>Period: 62</b>



<b>A . Aims : help ss listen the main ideas and details about activities Hoa did </b>
yesterday.


<b>B .Objectives : -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand </b>
the main ideas and details about activities Hoa did yesterday.



<b>I.Knowledge. - Activities Hoa did yesterday.</b>
- Simple past tense


<b>II. Skill . – Listening skill.</b>
<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , mradio , picture p 100 </b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : indi … , t – wc . </b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : Ss may have difficulty in listening . T can help ss to</b>
predict before listening .


<b>F . Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting . </b>
<b>II- Revision . </b>
<b> III.New lesson. </b>


Teacher’s activities <sub>Students’activities</sub>
<b>I.Pre </b>–<b>listening (15ms)</b>


1.Pre – teach


Teacher elicits to teach vocab.


-(to) put on clothers : picture :mặc q a
(to) polish the shoes : mime đánh dày
- red pans : translation quần ngủ màu


đỏ .


- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.


<b>-</b> Check vocab’ What and where ‘


<b>-</b> guess


<b>-</b> listen & repeat


<b>-</b> copy down


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.



- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


<b>-</b> Copying the words.


Teacher’s activities Students’activities
put on


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

*orderning pictures


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss
to work in individual then in pairs & in
groups to predict the missing words to
fill in the dialogue


- Asks Ss to compare & give their
prediction.


- Comments S’s prediction.
<b>II. While </b>–<b> listening(20ms)</b>


<b>-</b> Teachers turns on the tapes 3
times.


<b>-</b> Teacher gives answer key :
1. a 5. g


2. e 6. c


3. f 7. h
4. d 8. b


<b>-</b> Teacher corrects


<b>III.Post-listening(7ms)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students retell the
story (using the right order of the
picture P.100).


* Ex:


Yesterday, Hoa got up and took a
shower. She put on clean clothes…


-Ss enjoy the game.


<b>-</b> Look & predict.


<b>-</b> Students guess the order of the
picture P.100. A2.


<b>-</b> Students listen to the tape and
check their ideas.


- Working in individual then in pairs &
in groups to predict the missing words
to fill in the dialogue .



-TAPE TRANSCRIPT :


- Yesterday , Hoa got up and took a
shower . She put on clean clothes . She
polished her shoes and put them on .
She had her breakfast and then she
brushed her teeth .


She put a sandwich in her luch box and
a bottle of water in her bag . she went
to school .


At recess , she ate her sandwich . Then
she drank some water and talk with her
friends .


At home , she changed into red pants
and a shirt , and she put on her sandals.
After dinner , She washed and ironed
her clothes . Then she did her home
work . she brushed her teeth and had a
bath . Then she went to bed at 11 o’
clock .


Comparing & give their prediction .


<b>-</b> Take note .


<b>-</b> Students work in groups to retell
the story.



<b>-</b> Share


<b>-</b> Read


<b>IV.Consolidation </b><b>2ms)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
<b>V.Homework </b><b>1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all vocab.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercise in “post listening” in your exercise notebook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson Unit 10. A3.
<b>G .Can improve</b>


…...
...


.<i>THE END</i>


polish
the


shoes put on


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

Preparing’s day: 17/01/2011


<b>Unit 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE</b>



<b>Lesson 3: Personal hygiene <A3- 4></b>



<b>Period: 63</b>



<b>A . Aims . Help ss read Nam’s diary and write main ideas and details about </b>
activities Hoa did yesterday


<b>B . Objectives . By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the</b>
main ideas of Nam ’s diary and details about activities Hoa did yesterday.


<b>I.Knowledge. </b>– Activities Hoa did yesterday.
- Simple past tense .


<b>II. Skill . – Writting skill . </b>
<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : picture p101 , cue words . </b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T –wc , pw , indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : There are not nay problems in this period . </b>
<b>F. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting .</b>
<b>II- Revision .</b>
III.New lesson.


Teacher’s activities Students’activities


<b>I.</b> <b>Pre </b>–<b>writing(10ms)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher gives a question :
_+ What time does Nam get up?
Ex:


S1: What time does Nam get up ?
S2: He gets up at 6 : 30


<b>-</b> Teacher corrects


<b>II.</b> <b>While </b>–<b> writing(25ms)</b>


Act1: Teacher gives some information.


<b>-</b> 5 : 00 get up.


<b>-</b> 6 : 00 listen to the music.


<b>-</b> 6 : 30 wash face.


Act2: Teacher gives some questions:


<b>-</b> What time do you get up ?


<b>-</b> What … have breakfast?
<b>-</b> ….... go to bed ?


Ex:



S1 : What time do you have breakfast ?
S2: I have breakfast at 6 : 00.


(or):


S1 : What time do you go to bed ?
S2: I go to bed at 10 : 00


<b>-</b> Teacher corrects.


<b>-</b> Teacher gives exercises A1. in
P61 work book


? What did Nam do yesterday?
<b>III.Post-writing(7ms)</b>


-T correct the writing A4 p102


Get ss write the letter in the note


<b>-</b> Students work in pair to ask the
question.


<b>-</b> Students write a daily entry
themselves.


<b>-</b> Students work in pairs. Ask &
answer the questions.


Take note.



<b>-</b> Students write the sentences.
-Ss take note.


<b>-</b> work in npairs and compare the
keys :


<b>-</b> 1 was


<b>-</b> 2 having


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

books . <b>-</b> 4 take


<b>-</b> 5 get


<b>-</b> 6 go


<b>-</b> 7 wash


<b>-</b> Iron


<b>-</b> 9 eating


<b>-</b> 10 told


<b>-</b> 11 see


<b>-</b> 12 go


<b></b>



<b>-IV.Consolidation </b><b>2ms)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
<b>V.Homework </b><b>1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson Unit 10. B1 – 4..
<b>G .Can improve : </b>


…...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

<b>WEEK: 22</b>


Preparing’s day: 23/01/2011


<b>Unit 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE</b>


<b>Lesson 4: A bad toothache <B1,4></b>



<b>Period: 64</b>



<b>A . Aims : </b>

Help ss read a dialouge about visiting the dentist and


develop speaking skill .




<b>B . Objectives : -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about a </b>
visit to the dentist using “Why and because”.


<b>I.Knowledge. </b>– Simple past tense .


- Using “Why and because”.
<b>II. Skill . – Reading and speaking skill . </b>
<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , radio , picture p103 ,wordsquare . </b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T –wc , pw , indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems :. : Ss may have difficulty in speaking B4 . T can do </b>
an example .


<b>F . Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting. ( 1 ms )</b>
<b>II- Revision . ( 6ms) </b>


-“Wordsquare” ( Answer key:


looked,saw,drank,stopped,ate,felt )


T S H O D V T A


O L S P H L M A



L O O K E D Q B


D R A N K I T V


F E L T M D Y T


S A W N E X H N


Z H K L M O A C


S T O P P E D V


III.New lesson.


Teacher’s activities Students’activities


<b>1. Presentation.(15ms)</b>
a.Pre-teach.


-dentist
-cavity
-to be scared


-(to) have a toothache
-(to) fill


-(to) fix


- Introduces the words by explaining the


meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Check vocab.


-“What and Where”
c.Presentation dialogue.


<b>-</b> B1 P.103


<b>-</b> Questions a- b text book


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the


pronunciation.


<b>-</b> Copying the words.
Model sentences.


S1: I have an appointment at 10:30 this
morning,but I’m scared.


S2: Why?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

<b>2. Practice.(20ms)</b>


<b>-</b> “Picture drill”


<b>a)</b> tooth/ hurt- have cavity
<b>b)</b> nervous- see/ dentist
<b>c)</b> cavity/ not serious- small
<b>d)</b> happy- teeth/ OK


<b>3. Production.(7ms)</b>


<b>-</b> B4 P.65 (Workbook)


<b>-</b> T controls and corrects.


Example exchange:
S1: Minh’s tooth hurt
S2: Why?


S1: Because he has a cavity.


…...etc.


<b>IV.Consolidation </b><b>2ms)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
<b>V.Homework </b><b>1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 10. B2
<b>G .Can improve</b>


…...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

Preparing’s day: 24/01/2011


<b>Unit 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE</b>


<b>Lesson 5: A bad toothache <B2,3></b>



<b>Period: 65</b>



<b>A . Aims : </b>

- Help ss read a tex about visiting the dentist and develop


listening skill .



<b>B .Objectives . </b>

–By the end of this lesson, students will be able to



understand the details about how the dentist helps the children teeth .



<b>I.Knowledge . – How the dentist helps the children teeth . </b>
<b>II. Skill . – Listening-reading skill .</b>


<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , radio , picture p104 . </b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T –wc , pw , indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems :. : Ss may have difficulty in listening B4 . T can get </b>
ss predict before listening .


<b>.F . Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting . </b>


<b>II- Revision . –“Slap the board” (5ms)</b>


scared dentist look after
clearn the teeth wash the hands




-T reads the words in VietNamese.
-Ss slap the words in English.
<b> III.New lesson . </b>



Teacher’s activities Students’activities
<b>I.Pre-listening.(10ms)</b>


a.Pre teach.


-(to) explain giảng giải , giảI thích
-advice (n) lời khuyên


- advise (v) khuyªn


-sensible/ sensibly ( a/ adv) hợp lý
-surgery (n) phòng mổ


-important (a) quan trọng


- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.



- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> “What and Where”
c.Open prediction


Dr. Lai’s Job
Dr. Lai’s clothes
How chidlren feel ?
Dr. Lai helps


children Gives…...<sub></sub>




-Tells…..
Reminds….
<b>II.While-listening.(7ms)</b>


T turns on the tape to aks Ss listen and
check their prediction.



<b>III.Pre-reading.(3ms)</b>
c.T/F statement prediction.
1 . Dr. Lai is very kind
2 . Minh has one big cavity.


3 .Minh brushes his teeth regulary.
4 . Clearn teeth are healthy teeth.


<b>IV.While-reading.(10ms)</b>
Activity 1:


T asks Ss to read the text and check
their prediction.Activity 2:


T asks Ssto read the text again and
complete the story B3 P.104.


Activity 3:


<b>-</b> B5 P.106 ( Text book)


<b>-</b> T corrects.


<b>V.Post-reading and listening.</b>
<b>(3ms)</b>


T gives a question” how do you look
after your teeth ?” to aks Ss to discuss.
- T corrects.



- Working in pairs to predict .
- Comparing & Giving the keys.
Tape trancript :


Dr Lai is a dentist at Quang Trung
shool .She look after the student ‘s
teeth . Dr Lai office is clean and so is
her uniform .She always washes the
hand after each child leaves . Many
children are scared when they come to
see Dr lai , but she is a kind woman
.She explains what will happen so they
are not afraid . Dr Lai gives the childen
avice . she tell them to clean their teeth
regulary . and eat sensibtly .


-Ss predict.T or F ?


- Ss read the text and check the


<b>IV.Consolidation </b><b>1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
<b>V.Homework </b><b>1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.



<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 11. A1
<b>G .Can improve</b>


…...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

Unit 11 : KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY

<b>Lesson 1: A CHECK - UP <A1></b>



<b>Period: 66</b>



<b>A . Aims : - </b>

Help ss read a dialogue to understand the detals and


practise

Would you like

……

?



<b>B . Objectives </b>

.

<b> </b>

-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk


about temperature, height and weight.



<b>I.Knowledge . –Simple past tense.</b>


-Temperature, height and weight.
<b>II. Skill . – Reading and speaking skill. </b>


<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , radio , picture p107,pelmanism . </b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T –wc , pw , indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>



<b> Anticipated problems :. : Ss may have difficulty in comprehension </b>
questions . T can explain .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting .</b>
<b>II- Revision .</b>


-“Pelmanism” (5ms)


leave fill take tell be go see know


left filled took told was/were went saw knew




<b>III.New lesson</b>


Teacher’s activities Students’activities
<b>1. Presentation.(15ms)</b>


a.Pre teach.


-a medical check up ( n) buổi kh¸m
sức khỏe


-medical record ( n) phiÕu kh¸m
-height (n) chiỊu cao


-(to) weigh : c©n


-(to) measure : ®o


-(to) take temperature : đo nhiệt độ
- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> R.O.R


c.Presentation text.


<b>-</b> A1 P.108


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the
letter.


- Asks Ss to read the letter in individual
& check their prediction.



- Asks Ss to correct the keys.
- Corrects & comments.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the game.


- Reading the text in individual &
check their prediction.


- Correcting the keys.
d.Model sentences:


-The nurse weighed Hoa
called


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

<b>2. Practice.(20ms)</b>


<b>-</b> “picture drill”



(Using the pictures P.70 – workbook)
Example:


The nurse weighed Hoa
The nurse measured Hoa


The nurse took Hoa’s temperature.
The nurse started a medical chek up .
…...etc.


<b>3. Production.(3ms)</b>


<b>-</b> A4 P.70 ( workbook)
T corrects .


-Ss practice well.


-Ss work individually – in pairs – in
groups.


<b>IV.Consolidation </b><b>1ms)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
<b>V.Homework </b><b>1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.



<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 11: A2-3
<b>G .Can improved</b>


…...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

<b>WEEK: 23</b>


Preparing’s day: 1/02/2011


<b>Unit 11 : KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY</b>


<b>Lesson 2: A CHECK - UP <A2-3></b>



<b>Period: 67</b>



<b>A . Aims : - </b>

Help ss listen to the details about personal information .



<b>B. Objectives –By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the</b>
details about personal information .


<b>I.Knowledge . –Simple past tense .</b>
- Personal information .


II. Skill . – Listening skill .
<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , radio , picture p108 . </b>
<b>D .</b>



<b> Ways of working : T –wc , pw , gw , indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : - Ss may have difficulty in filling A2. T can get ss </b>
to predict before listening .


<b>F. Proceduce .</b>
<b>I .Greeting :</b>


<b>II . Revision : -“Jumbled words” (5ms)</b>


KAS=? (Answer key: ask, short, measure, heavy, height)
EIGHTH=?


MSUREEA=?
EAHVY=?
HORST=?
III.New lesson


Teacher’s activities Students’activities
<b>1. Pre-listening.(15ms)</b>


<b>a.T gives A2 P.108 (text book) to </b>
aks Ss to predict the missing words.
D: I want to…...you a few


questions before I start, Hoa, …...old
are you?



H: fourteen.


D: And…...height is one
meter…...centimeter?


H: No, I think I’m…...The nurse
measure …...


D: Oh.how …....are you?
H: One…....45…...


D:I…...aks the …...to check
your…...again. How heavy are
you?


H: I…....I’m 42 kilos.


D: ….It says on your…..that you’re
40 kilos.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

- Introduces the requirement & asks
Ss to work in individual then in pairs
& in groups to predict the missing
words to fill in the dialogue


- Asks Ss to compare & give their
prediction.


- Comments S’s prediction.



<b>b. Presentation dialogue : A2 </b>–
<b>P108</b>


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to
the dialogue.


- Asks Ss to listen to the dialogue &
get the idea.


- Asks Ss to check their prediction.
- Corrects S’s prediction &
comments.


<b>2. While-listening.(15ms)</b>


-T turns on the tape to ask Ss to
check their prediction.


<b>3. Post-listening.(8ms)</b>
- A3 P.108-109 Text book


- Introduces the requirement & asks
Ss to work in pairs to play one is A
& one is B then look at the medical
records & cover the other to fill in
the missing information


- Asks Ss to use these questions form
to ask & answer for information.



? – Which…?
? – What is his…?
? – Where does he …?
? – How…is he ?


- Asks Ss to compare & give their
answers.


- Corrects & comments.


Working in individual then in pairs & in
groups to predict the missing words to
fill in the dialogue


- Comparing & give their predicti.


- Listening to the dialogue & get the idea.
- Listening to the dialogue & check the
prediction.


-Ss listen to the tape and check their
prediction.


Answer keys:


1.ask 2.how 3.your 4.50
5.shorter 6.me 7.tall
8.meter….cetimeter


9.nurse 10.heoght 11.think. 12.no


13.form


- Working in pairs to play one is A & one
is B then look at the medical records &
cover the other to fill in the missing
information


- Using the questions form to ask &
answer for information.


- Comparing & give their answers.
- Correcting the answer keys.
Answer keys:


MEDICAL RECORD
School: Nguyen Du school.
Class: 7A.


FULL NAME


 Fore name: Van Kien.


 Surname: Tran.


Address: 66 Ham long Street Hanoi.
Male:  Female:


Age: 12.
Weight: 41 kg.
Height: 140 cm.



<b>IV.Consolidation </b><b>1m) –</b>Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.


<b>V. Homework </b><b>1m) –Learning by heart all content . Doing exercises in </b>
workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 11: B1-2


<b>G .Can improve : </b>


Preparing’s day: 1/02/2011


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

<b>Lesson 3: WHAT WAS WRONG WITH YOU ?<B1-2></b>


<b>Period: 68</b>



<b>A . Aims : - Help ss talk about names of illness. </b>
<b>B</b>


<b> . Objectives : -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about</b>
names of illness.


<b>I.Knowledge. –Simple past tense .</b>
- Names of illness .


<b>II. Skill . – Reading and speaking skill .</b>
<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , radio , picture p 110. </b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T –wc , pw , gw , indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>



<b> Anticipated problems : - Ss may have difficulty in taking a survey . T can </b>
do an exxample .


<b>.F. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I . Greeting : </b>


<b>II- Revision : -“Slap the board” (5ms)</b>


I’m 14 years old. I’m 40 kilos 1m50
15 Le loi Street class 7A


Ss listen and slap the suitable responses.
<b>1)</b> What class are you in?
<b>2)</b> How old are you?
<b>3)</b> Where do you live?
<b>4)</b> How heavy are you?
<b>5)</b> How tall are you?
III.New lesson


Teacher’s activities Students’activities
<b>1. Presentation.(15ms)</b>


a.Pre teach.


-(to) have a headache : đau đầu
a stomachache : đau bụng


a toothache : đau răng


a cold : cảm lạnh


the flu : cảm cúm
a virus : sốt vi rót


- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation &
gives example.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> R.O.R


c.Presentation dialogue.


<b>-</b> B1 P.110


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & practice the dialogue in


pairs.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual & Correcting the mistakes
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


d.Comprehension questions.


<b>-</b> a)- e) text book P.110


- Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer the questions.
- Asks Ss to give the answers &
corrects.


* Questions:


a. Why didn’t Lan go to school
yesterday ?


b. What was wrong with her ?


c. What does Mr. Tan tell Lan to do ?
d.What did the doctor say about Lan’s


problem?


e. Who wrote Lan’s sick note ?
e.Model sentences:


- Introduces the model sentence &
explains the form & use of the past
simple tense.


<b>2. Practice.(15ms)</b>


<b>-</b> “Word cues drill”


<b>a)</b> you/ a headache
<b>b)</b> He/ a stomachache
<b>c)</b> She/ a toothache


d) Mary/ a cold
e)Tom/ the flu


f)Lan/ a virus
- Introduces the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example &
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in
individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the
next.



- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs &
Corrects


<b>3. Production.(8ms)</b>
- Survey B2 P.111 –text book


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss
to work in pairs ask & answer these
questions & check the table.


a. Were you absent from school last
year ?


b. Were you sick ?


c. Did you have a headache/ a
stomachache/ a toothache/ a cold/ a
virus/ the flu ?


- Asks Ss to combine their answering
for the whole class & answer this
question:


? What was the most common illness ?
- Asks Ss to give the answers.


- Corrects & comments.



- Working in pairs to answer the
questions.


- Giving the answers & correcting.
* Answers:


a. Because she had a bad cold.
b. She was sick.


c. He asked her to stay inside at recess.
d. She had a virus.


e. The doctor write the sick note for
her.


Model sentences:


S1: What was wrong with you?
S2: I had a bad cold.


- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
Example exchange:


S1:What was wrong with you?
S2: He had a toothache.


- Working in pairs to ask & answer the


questions & checking the table.


- Comparing their answering.
- Giving the answers.


- Combining their answering for the
whole class & answer this question:
? What was the most common
illness ?


- Comparing their answering.
- Giving the answers.


<b>IV.Consolidation </b><b>1m)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 11: B3
<b>G .Can improve</b>


…...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

Preparing’s day: 2/02/2011


<b>Unit 11 : KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY</b>




<b>Lesson 4: WHAT WAS WRONG WITH YOU ?<B3></b>


<b>Period: 69</b>



<b>A .</b>


<b> Aims : - Help ss listen about the details about days lost through sickness in </b>
class 7A last semester.


<b>B . Objectives –By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand </b>
the details about days lost through sickness in class 7A last semester.


<b>I.Knowledge. –Simple past tense .</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , radio , picture p 110. </b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T –wc , pw , gw , indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : - Ss may have difficulty in listening b3 . T can get </b>
them predict before listening .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting : </b>


<b>II- Revision : -“Slap the board” (5ms)</b>



headache stomachache cold


a toothache virus
T calls out in VietNamese.


Ss slap the words in English.
III.New lesson


Teachers activities Studentsactivities
<b>1. Pre-listening.(15ms)</b>


a.Pre teach.


-absence ( n )vắng mặt
-sickness : ( n) èm


-due to : = because ( conj) bëi v×
-(to) account : chiÕm ( tỉng sè )
-(to) cause : do


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.



- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> R.O.R


c.Open prediction.
Name of


illness GroupA Group<b>B</b> GroupC GroupD
cold


flu


stomachache
headache
toothache


-T asks Ss work in group to predict the days
lost through sickness.


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work
in four groups to predict the day lost through
sickness to fill in the table.


- Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction &
Comments S’s prediction.



<b>d. Presentation dialogue : B3 </b>–<b>P111.</b>


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue.


- Asks Ss to listen to the dialogue & get the
idea.


- Asks Ss to check their prediction.
- Corrects S’s prediction & comments.


<b>2. While-listening.(15ms)</b>


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in
chorus & in individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning &
thepronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Enjoy the game.


- Working in four groups to
predict the day lost through
sickness to fill in the table.
- Comparing & give their


prediction.


<b>-</b> Listening to the


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

-T turns on the tape to aks Ss to listen to the
tape carefully and fill in the table above.
TAPE TRANSCRIPT :


Last semester in class 7a ,there was a total of
112 days’ absence due to sickness . The total
breaks down as follow : most absence -43 –
were due to flu . Then came stomach problems
with 37 . Toothacge came next with 17 . Colds
accounted for 10 absences . finally , headaches
caysed 5 days’ absence .


<b>3. Post-listening.(8ms)</b>


<b>-</b> B2 P.72 (work book)


<b>-</b> T asks Ss to complete the dialogue and
then work in pairs to practise speaking.


<b>-</b> Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to complete the conversation
using the correct form of the verbs in the
brackets.


<b>-</b> - Asks Ss to compare & give the



- Listening to the dialogue &
check the prediction.


*Answer key:
cold: 10
flu: 43


stomachache: 37
headache: 5
toothache: 17


- Working in pairs to complete
the conversation using the
correct form of the verbs in the
brackets.


- Comparing & give their
answers.


- Correcting the answer keys.
* Answer keys:


a. didn’t
b. was
c. had
d. had
e. was


f. had
g. ate


h. did
i. feeling
j. am
k. going


<b>IV.Consolidation </b><b>1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
<b>V.Homework </b><b> 1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 11: B4-5
<b>VI.Can improved</b>


…...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

<b>WEEK: 24</b>



Preparing’s day: 7/02/2011


<b>Unit 11 : KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY</b>



<b>Lesson 5: WHAT WAS WRONG WITH YOU ?<B4-5></b>


<b>Period: 70</b>




<b>A .</b>


<b> Aims : Help ss read a text to understand the details about the common cold .</b>
<b>B . Objectives .-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the</b>
details about the common cold.


<b>I.Knowledge . – Simple past tense.</b>
- The common cold.


<b>II. Skill . – Reading skill . </b>
<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , radio , picture p 112. </b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T –wc , pw , gw , indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : - Ss may have difficulty in questions . T can </b>
explain and get ss to play LNs .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>-II- Revision. –“Matching”(3ms)</b>
have a cold


have the flu



have a stomachache
have headache
have a toothache
to be sick


<b>- Introduces the word & the meaning & asks Ss to work in pairs to match the</b>
word to its meaning.


- Corrects & comments.
III.New lesson


Teacher’s activities Students’activities
1. Pre-reading.(15ms)


a.Pre teach.
-(to) cough : ho
-(to) sneeze : hắt hơi
-disease ( n) bệnh tật
-a runny nose : ( n) sỉ mịi
-a slight fever ( n) sèt nhĐ
-symptom ( n) triƯu trøng


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &


corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> R.O.R


c.Open prediction. …..


What are the symptoms of the
common cold ?


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

….
runny nose


- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss
to work in pairs to predict what are the


symptom of the common cold.


- Asks Ss to compare the keys give the
keys & Comments.


d.Presentation text: B4 – P112


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text.
- Asks Ss to read the text in individual
& check their prediction & give the
main ideals of the text.


- Asks Ss to correct the keys.
- Corrects & comments.


2. While-reading.(15ms)
Activity 1:


T asks Ss to read the text and check
their prediction.


Activity 2:


-_ Wh-questions.


( a)- d) P. 112 text book)


- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to
work in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.



- Asks Ss to give the answer keys.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
<b> Questions:</b>


<i>a. Why do we call the cold common ?</i>‘ ’


<i>b. What are the symptom of the</i>
<i>common cold ?</i>


<i>c. Is there a cure for common cold ?</i>
<i>d. Do cold cure work ?What do they</i>
<i>do ?</i>


<i>e. How can you help prevent a cold ?</i>


<b>4.</b> Post-reading(10ms).


<b>-</b> “Discission”


“How can you help prevent a cold?”
- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
work in groups to discuss.


- Asks Ss to report their information.
- Comments.


-T cotrols and corrects.


- Working in pairs to predict what are


the symptom of the common cold.
- Comparing & Giving the keys.


- Reading the text in individual &
check their prediction then give the
main ideals of the text.


- Correcting the keys.


Ss read the text and check their
prediction.


*Answer key:
<b>1)</b> cough
<b>2)</b> sneeze


<b>3)</b> a runny nose
<b>4)</b> a slight fever


- Working in pairs to ask & answer
the questions.


- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting


<i> Answer:</i>


<i>a. Because every year million of</i>
<i>people catch it.</i>



b. They’re: running nose; slight fever;
coughing & sneezing.


<i>c. No, there isn t.</i>’


d. No, they don’t. But they do relieve
symptom.


<i>e. We can prevent a cold by eating </i>
<i>well, doing exercise, keeping fit & </i>
<i>staying healthy.</i>


- Working in groups to discuss about
the topic “<i>How can you help prevent a</i>
<i>cold ?</i>”.


- Reporting their information.


<b>IV.Consolidation </b><b>1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
<b>V.Homework 1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 12: A 1-2
<b>G .Can improve</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

Preparing’s day: 8/02/2011


<b>WRITTEN TEST III (A)</b>
<b>Period: 71</b>


<b>A .</b>


<b> Aims : Help ss check their comprehension from unit 9 to unit 11.</b>


<b>B . Objectives .-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to know their </b>
stander and T can find the ways to teach better .


<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : paper tests .</b>
<b>D .</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : - Ss may have difficulty in listening ex . T can </b>
explain and get ss to listen .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Choose the best answer ( A,B or C ? )(2,5Ms)</b>
<b>1.I played volleyball...</b>



A.everyday B. now C.last week


<b>2.How far is it from the toystore...the minimark ?</b>


A.from B.to C.in


<b>3.What...wrong with him? He had a toothache.</b>


A.is B.be C.was


<b>4.Did you...anything here ? Yes, I did.</b>


A.buy B.buying C.bought


<b>5.Nam likes bananas and...</b>


A.so do I B.neither do I C.too do I


<b>6.My sister doesn't like carrots, ...</b>


A.so do I B.neither do I C.too do I


<b>7.There are ...eggs in the refrigerator.</b>


A.lots of B.an C.any


<b>8.What would you like...breakfast ?</b>


A.to B.for C.in



<b>9...didn't you go to school yesterday?</b>


A.How B.What C.Why


<b>10.The dentist...a cavity in my tooth.</b>


A.filled B.made C.had


<b>II.Put the verbs in the brackets into corrects form.(2,5Ms)</b>


<b>1.</b> Yesterday morning, the nurse ...Hoa to go back to the hospital
(tell)


<b>2.</b> Two years ago, I...one meter and forty-five centimeters (be)
<b>3.</b> Where...you...that hat ? (buy)


<b>4.</b> Last night, they...T.V at home. (watch)
<b>5.</b> Everyday, Na...to school at 12:30. (go)


<b>III.Put the verbs in the simple past tense.(1M)</b>


<b>1.look -...</b> <b>6.cut-...</b>
<b>2.make-...</b> <b>7.be-...</b>
<b>3.think-...</b> <b>8.clean-...</b>
<b>4.do-...</b> <b>9.have-...</b>
<b>5.help-...</b> <b>10.give-...</b>
<b>IV. Fill the blank with one word in the box.(2,5Ms)</b>


Hoa was born in Hue but now she is ...(1)...in Ha Noi with


her aunt and uncle. She left Hue two years ago. Now she is...


(2)...at Quang Trung shool. They...(3)... lots of food and cakes.
In the evening Hoa had a stomachache. Her aunt was worried. She...


(4)...a doctor. The doctor arrived and gave Hoa some...
(5)... She took the medicines and went to bed. Today Hoa is going to
school.


<b>1...2...</b>


<b>3...4...5...</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

<b>V.Read the passage again and check the correct colums according to </b>
<b>whether the information is true(T) or false (F).(1,5Ms)</b>


<b>1.Hoa is living in Hue.</b>


<b>2.She left Hue two years ago.</b>
<b>3.She ate a little food and cakes.</b>
<b>4.She was born in Ha Noi.</b>
<b>5.Hoa had a stomachache.</b>


<b>6. Today Hoa is staying at home.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

<b>WRITTEN TEST(B)</b>



<b>I.Choose the best answer (2,5Ms)</b>
<b>1.He played football...</b>



A. everyday <b>B.now</b> <b>C.lastweek</b>
<b>2.How far is it from the toystore... the minimart ?</b>


A. from <b>B.to</b> <b>C.in</b>


<b>3.There isn't...water.</b>


A. any <b>B.an</b> <b>C.Some</b>


<b>4.What ...wrong with him? He had a toothache.</b>


A. is <b>B.were</b> <b>C.was</b>


<b>5.Did they ...anything here?</b>


A. buy <b>B.buying</b> <b>C.buys</b>


<b>6.Nga and her friends like bananas and...</b>
A. so do I <b>B.Neither do I</b> <b>C.I like, either</b>
<b>7.There are...oranges in the fridge.</b>


A. a lot of <b>B.an</b> <b>C.any</b>


<b>8.What would you like...breakfast?</b>


A. to <b>B.in</b> <b>C.for</b>


<b>9...didn't you go to school yesterday? Because I had a bad cold.</b>


A. How <b>B.What</b> <b>C.Why</b>



<b>10. My father doesn't like carrots,...</b>
A. So do I <b>B.Neither do I</b> <b>C.I like, too</b>
<b>II.Put the verbs in brackets into corrects forms. ( 2,5Ms)</b>


<b>1.She ...(have) spinach, fish and meat last night.</b>
2.Where...Nam... ……….(go) last summer?
<b>3.Two days ago, we...(visit) our grandfather.</b>


<b>4.There...(be) a souvernir shop near the exit of the aquarium. </b>
<b>5.Next summer holiday, My family...(go) to Ho Chi Minh city.</b>


<b>III.Put the verbs in the simple past tense. (1M)</b>


1.look -... 6.cut - ...
2.made -... 7.be -...
3.think -... 8.clearn -...
4.do -... 9.have -...
5.help -... 10.give -...
<b>IV.Fill in the blank with one word in the box.(2,5Ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

Hoa was born in Hue but now she is...(1)...in Ha Noi with her
aunt and her uncle. She left Hue two years ago. Now she is...(2)...at Quang
Trung school. At school she...(3)...a lot of food and cakes. In the evening
Hoa had a stomachache. Her aunt was worried. She ...(4)...the doctor
arrived and gave her some...(5)... She took the medicines and went to bed.
Today Hoa is going to shool.


<i><b>Answer:</b></i>



1. ...
2. ...
3. ...
4. ...
5. ...


<b>V.Read the passage again and answer the question below.( 1,5M)</b>
1.Where is she living now?


...
<b>2.What did she eat at school?</b>


...
<b>3.What was wrong with Hoa?</b>


...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

Preparing's day: 7/02/2010


<b>Check the test III</b>


<b>Time : 45 minutes.</b>


<b>Period : 72</b>
<b>A .</b>


<b> Aims : Help ss consolidate the knowledge from the text . </b>


<b>B . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate </b>
the knowledge from the text.



<b>I.Knowledge. -The present simple.</b>
-The "Will" future
-The prepositions
-The simple past.
<b>II. Skill . -Writting skill . </b>


<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : paper tests .</b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : - Ss may have difficulty in listening ex . T can </b>
explain and get ss to listen .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>
II- Revision.


Teacher's activities Students'activitie


s
<b>I.Choose the best answer ( A,B or C ? )(2,5Ms)</b>


<b>1.I played volleyball...</b>


A.everyday B. now C.last week



<b>2.How far is it from the toystore...the minimark ?</b>


A.from B.to C.in


<b>3.What...wrong with him? He had a toothache.</b>


A.is B.be C.was


<b>4.Did you...anything here ? Yes, I did.</b>


A.buy B.buying C.bought


<b>5.Nam likes bananas and...</b>
A.so do I B.neither do I C.too do I


<b>6.My sister doesn't like carrots, ...</b>
A.so do I B.neither do I C.too do I


<b>7.There are ...eggs in the refrigerator.</b>


A.lots of B.an C.any


<b>8.What would you like...breakfast ?</b>


A.to B.for C.in


<b>9...didn't you go to school yesterday?</b>


A.How B.What C.Why



<b>10.The dentist...a cavity in my tooth.</b>


A.filled B.made C.had


<b>II.Put the verbs in the brackets into corrects form.(2,5Ms)</b>
1.Yesterday morning, the nurse ...Hoa to go back to the
hospital (tell)


2.Two years ago, I...one meter and forty-five
centimeters (be)


3.Where...you...that hat ? (buy)
4.Last night, they...T.V at home. (watch)
5.Everyday, Na...to school at 12:30. (go)
<b>III.Put the verbs in the simple past tense.(1M)</b>


<b>1.look -...</b> <b>6.cut-...</b>
<b>2.make-...</b> <b>7.be-...</b>
<b>3.think-...</b> <b>8.clean-...</b>


answer key
-Ss give the
asnwer and takes
notes the correct
of teacher


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

<b>4.do-...</b> <b>9.have-...</b>
<b>5.help-...</b> <b>10.give-...</b>


<b>IV. Fill the blank with one word in the box.</b>


<b>(2,5Ms) </b>


<b>studying called ate living medicine </b>
Hoa was born in Hue but now she is ...(1)...in
Ha Noi with her aunt and uncle. She left Hue two years ago. Now
she is...(2)...at Quang Trung shool. They...
(3)... lots of food and cakes. In the evening Hoa had a


stomachache. Her aunt was worried. She...(4)...a doctor.
The doctor arrived and gave Hoa some...(5)... She
took the medicines and went to bed. Today Hoa is going to school.
<b>V.Read the passage again and check the correct colums </b>


<b>according to whether the information is true(T) or false (F).</b>
<b>(1,5Ms)</b>


<b>1.Hoa is living in Hue.</b>


<b>2.She left Hue two years ago.</b>
<b>3.She ate a little food and cakes.</b>
<b>4.She was born in Ha Noi.</b>
<b>5.Hoa had a stomachache.</b>
<b> 6. Today Hoa is staying at home.</b>


3.thought
4.did
5.helped
6.cut


7.was/were


8.cleaned
9.had
10.gave
<b>IV. </b>
1.living
2.studying
3.ate
4.called
5.medicine


V.
1.F
2.T
3.F
4.F
5.T
6.F


<b>IV. Consolidation.</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main grammar in this text.
<b>V.Homework.</b>


-Doing exercise : doing again the text at home.
-Preparing: Unit 12 :A1-2


<b>G .Can improve</b>

<b>WEEK: 25</b>



Preparing's day: 14 /02/2011



<b>Unit 12 : LET'S EAT !</b>



<b>Lesson 1: WHAT SHALL WE EAT ? <A1-2></b>


<b>Period: 73</b>



<b>A .</b>


<b> Aims : Help ss to use "too/so" to talk about preferences.</b>


<b>B . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to use "too/so" to</b>
talk about preferences.


<b>I.Knowledge. - Using "too/so" to talk about preferences. .</b>
<b>II. Skill . - - Reading and speaking skill .</b>


<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , radio pictures p 114 , 115 .</b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T – wc , pw , gw , indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : - Ss may have difficulty in using "too/so" to talk </b>
about preferences. . T can explain and get ss to listen .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>



<b>II- Revision : -"Jumbled words"(3MS)</b>


tmea =? ( Answer key: meat,beef,chicken,vegetable,carrot,pea)
feeb =?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

ape =?
III.New lesson


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Presentation.(15ms)</b>


a.Pre teach.


-pork (n) : thịt lợn


-spinach ( n) rau chân vịt
-cucumber (n ) quả ra chuột
-papaya ( n) quả đu đủ
-pineapple ( n) quả dứa
-durian ( n) quả sầu riêng


- Introduces the words by explaining the meaning,
using the situation & gives example.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then
helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the
mistakes.



- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning &
the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> "Matching"


<b>-</b> (Using pictures)
c.Presentation dialogue.
- A1 P.114-115


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue &
practice the dialogue in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


- Introduces the model sentence & explains the form
& use of the past simple tense.


<b>2. Practice.(17ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "Word cue drill"
<b>a)</b> spinach/ Tom
<b>b)</b> pork/ She
<b>c)</b> pineapple/ He
<b>d)</b> durian/ Mary
<b>e)</b> chicken/ They


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to


practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to
repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups
& in pairs & Corrects.


<b>3. Production.(8ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "Noughts and Crosses"


I/eat/fish She/like/banana
Tom/hate/fish


(Mary) (we) (You)
He/like/coffee I/eat/bread


we/love/apple


(Lan) (Mai) (Hoa)


- Repeating the words in
chorus & in individual
& Correcting the
mistakes


- Giving the meaning &


the pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


- Practicing the dialogue
in pairs


-Correcting the


pronunciation.


<i>Model sentences:</i>


S1: I like beef.
S2: I like,too


< So do I >


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus &
in individual.


- Making sentences for
the next cues.


- Practicing in groups &
in pairs .


- Correcting the
pronunciation.



Example exchange:
S1: I like spinach.
S2: Tom likes


spinach,too/So does
Tom.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

They/eat/meat Mai/drink/coffee My
house/big


(We) (Nga) (An)
-T controls and corrects.


IV.Consolidation :(1m)


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
V.Homework :(1m)


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 12: A 1-2(cont)
<b>G .Can improve</b>


...
...
Preparing's day: 15/02/2011


<b>Unit 12 : LET'S EAT !</b>




<b>Lesson 2: WHAT SHALL WE EAT ? <A1-2 (cont)></b>


<b>Period: 74</b>



<b>A .</b>


<b> Aims : Help ss to use "either/neither" to express preferences. </b>
<b>B . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to </b>
use"either/neither" to express preferences.


<b> I.Knowledge. - Using "either/neither" to express preferences. </b>
<b>II. Skill . - - Reading and speaking skill .</b>


<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , radio pictures p 114 , 115 .</b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T – wc , pw , gw , indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : - Ss may have difficulty in using "either/neither" </b>
to talk about preferences. . T can explain and get ss to listen .


F. Proceduce.


<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>-II- Revision : -"Matching"(3ms)</b>



Matching a part of words in column A with a part words in column B to
make a right word.


A B


be apple


pine ana


chic ef (beef)


ban rian


du ken


ri range


ox rot


car ce


III.New lesson


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Presentation.(15ms)</b>


a.Presentation dialogue.


<b>-</b> A1 (P. 114-115)



- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & practice the dialogue in
pairs.


- Asks Ss to role-play the dialogue.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


- Introduces the model sentence &
explains the form & use of the past


- Practicing the dialogue in pairs
- Role-playing the dialogue.
-Correcting the pronunciation.


<b>Model sentence:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

simple tense.


<b>2. Practice.(18ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "Word cue drill"
<b>a)</b> a) spinach/ Tom
<b>b)</b> pork/ She


<b>c)</b> pineapple/ He
<b>d)</b> durian/ Mary
<b>e)</b> chicken/ They


- Introduces the example exchange &


Helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example &
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in
individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the
next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs &
Corrects.


Example exchange:
S1: I don't like papaya.


S2: I don't like papaya ,either./Neither
do I.


...etc.


<b>4. Production.(7ms)</b>


Make sentences with “Either &
neither”.


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss
to work in individual to make sentences
with “Either & neither”.



- Asks Ss to compare & give the
answers.


- Corrects & comments.
<b> Cues:</b>


<b>a.</b> I eat a little in the morning.
( they )


<b>b.</b> They don’t like pork. ( I ).


<b>c.</b> I eat bread for breakfast. ( my
sister )


<b>d.</b> He doesn’t have big lunch. ( they
)


<b>e.</b> These vegetable aren’t fresh.
(those fruit )


<b>f.</b> We love apple juice. (our cousins
<b>g.</b> Beans are very good for our


health.
( fresh fruit )


<b>-</b> T corrects.


S2:

I don’t like beef, either.


Neither do I.


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
<b> Example exchange: </b>


S1: I don’t like papaya.



S2:

I don’t like papaya, either.



Neither do I.


- Working in individual to make
sentences with “Either & neither”.
- Comparing & giving the answers.


<b>- </b>Correcting the answers.


Answer keys:


a. They eat either.


b. I don’t like either. / Neither do I.
c. My sister eats either.


d. They don’t have either. / Neither
do they.


e. Those fruits aren’t either. /


Neither those fruits .


f. Our cousins love either.
Fresh fruit are either


<b>IV.Consolidation :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
<b>V.Homework :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 12: A 3-4
<b>G .Can improve</b>


Preparing's day: 16/02/2011


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>

<b>Lesson 3: WHAT SHALL WE EAT ? <A3-4></b>


<b>Period: 75</b>



<b>A .</b>


<b> Aims : Help ss to understand the details about how did Hoa's aunt cook </b>
dinner.


<b>B . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the</b>
details about how did Hoa's aunt cook dinner.



<b> I.Knowledge. - - How did Hoa's aunt cook dinner.</b>
<b> II. Skill . - - Reading skill .</b>


<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , radio pictures p 116 , 117 .</b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T – wc , pw , gw , indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : - Ss may have difficulty in writing A4 . T can </b>
explain and get ss to listen


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>II- Revision: -"Chain game"(3ms)</b>
S1: Yesterday I ate bread for lunch.


S2: Yesterday I ate bread, fish for lunch.


S3: Yesterday I ate bread, fish, spinach for lunch.
S4:...etc.


III.New lesson


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1.</b> Pre-reading.(15ms)



a.Pre teach.


-(to) slice :thái thành lát mỏng
-(to) stir-fry : xào


-(to) add : thêm vào
-(to) boild : sôi


-(to) heat : đun nóng
-soy sauce : (Ơ n) xì dầu


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times
). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).
- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> "Matching"


<b>-</b> (Using pictures B3 P.116-text
book )



c.Ordering picture.


-T asks Ss to predict the right order of
the pictures P.117. (text book ).


- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
work in pairs to predict the steps Hoa’s
aunt does to cook dinner.


- Asks Ss to compare the keys give the
keys - Comments.


d. Presentation text: A3 – P116


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text.
- Asks Ss to read the text in individual &
check their prediction.


- Asks Ss to correct the prediction.
<b>2.</b> While-reading.(18ms)
Activity 1:


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the


pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


- Ss predict the right order of the
pictures P.117. (text book ).


- Reading the text in individual &
check their prediction.


- Correcting the keys.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

-T asks Ss to read the text and check
their prediction.


Activity 2:


T asks Ss to read the text again and do
A3 P.116 -text book.


- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to
work in pairs to ask & answer the
questions then make the menu for what
Hoa’s uncle family had for dinner.


- Asks Ss to give the answer keys.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
* Questions:


<i>a. What did Hoa, her uant & uncle have</i>


<i>foe dinner ? Write the menu.</i>


<b>3. Post-reading.(7ms)</b>


<b>-</b> B2 P.77 (workbook)
T controls and corrects .


*Answer key:
1. c


2. e
3. d
4. g
5. a
6. b
7. f


- Working in pairs to ask & answer
the questions then make the menu for
what Hoa’s uncle family have for
dinner.


- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting


Answer:


- Rice



<i>- Boiled spinach</i>


<i>-Cucumber salad with onion</i>
<i>- Stir-fried beef with green</i>


<i>peppers & onion.</i>


-Ss work individually - in pairs - in
groups.


<b>IV.Consolidation :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
<b>V.Homework :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 12: B1,4
<b>G .Can improve </b>


<b>WEEK: 26</b>


Preparing's day: 19/02/2011


<b>Unit 12 : LET'S EAT !</b>


<b>Lesson 4: OUR FOOD <B1,4></b>



<b>Period: 76</b>



<b>A .</b>


<b> Aims : Help ss to listen to specific information Why did Ba go to the doctor </b>
‘s? What did Nga , Lan Ba , Hoa eat ? And talk about healthy .


<b>B . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the</b>
details of the text and can talk about healthy.


<b> I.Knowledge . - The simple past tense.</b>


- Food and vegetables vocabulary.
<b> II. Skill . - - Reading and speaking skill .</b>


<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , radio pictures p 119 , 121 .</b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T – wc , pw , gw , indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : - Ss may have difficulty in listening B4. T can </b>
explain and get ss to predict before listening .


<b>F. Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting .</b>
<b>II- Revision .</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>

Food vegetables



...
.


III.New lesson


Teacher's activities Students'activities
1. Pre-reading.(10ms)


a.Pre teach.


-dirt (n) / dirty ( adj ) bÈn
-medicine ( n) thuèc
-soup ( n) canh , bét canh
b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> "What and Where"
c.Open prediction.


T gives a question to asks Ss to predict
What did Ba ate Yesterday?


...
bread


2. While-reading.(10ms)
Activity 1:


-T asks Ss to read the text and check their
prediction.



Activity 2:


<b>-</b> ""Wh-questions"


<b>1.</b> What's matter with Ba ?
<b>2.</b> Are his parents O.K ?
<b>3.</b> Did his Mom eat spinach ?
<b>4.</b> Dis his Mom wash the


spinach well ?


<b>5.</b> Why must we wash the
spinach well ?


_- T gives a game " Hang man " to ask Ss
to practice.


3.Pre-listening.(5ms)
-Open prediction.


T asks Ss to predict what Lan, ba, hoa
ate and drank.


Name
of food
and
drink


Lan Ba Nga Hoa



noodles
beef
juice
rice


4.While-listening.(10ms)


-T turns on the tape to asks Ss to listen
and check their prediction.


5.Post-listening.(5ms)


<b>-</b> "Find s.o who"
Find s.o who


ate ...yesterday. Name


fish Hoa


noodles ...


vegetables
beef


fruit


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.



- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


- Working in pairs to predict what Ba
ate yesterday.


- Comparing & Giving the keys.
- Working in pairs to ask &
answering the questions.


- Giving the answer by asking &
answering in pairs.


- Correcting the answers.
<b> Answer keys:</b>


1.He had an awful stomachache.
2.Yes, they are fine.


3.No, she didn’t.


4.No, she didn’t wash it.


5.It often have dirt from the farm<i><b>.</b></i>



- Working in individual then in pairs
& in groups to predict what Lan, Ba,
Hoa, Nga ate & drank.


- Comparing & give their prediction.
- Listening to the dialogue & get the
idea.


- Listening to the dialogue & check
the prediction.


*Answer key:


Lan: noodles, vegetables, juice
Ba: fish, rice, fruit, water
Nga: rice, vegetables, juice
Hoa: noodles, fruit, juice


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>

Example exchange:


Lan: Did you eat fish yesterday ?
Hoa: Yes, I did.


...etc.


-T controls and corrects.
-T corrects.


<b>IV.Consolidation :(1m)</b>



<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
<b>V.Homework :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>

Preparing's day: 20/02/2011


<b>Unit 12 : LET'S EAT !</b>


<b>Lesson 5: OUR FOOD <B2-3></b>



<b>Period: 77</b>


<b>A .</b>


<b> Aims : Help ss read comprehension and futher practice in indefinite </b>
quantifiiers “ a little . too much , plenty of , a lot of , lots of “


<b>B . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the</b>
details of the text and can futher practice in indefinite quantifiiers “ a little . too
much , plenty of , a lot of , lots of “ .


<b>-</b> <b> I . Knowledge . Practising writing a menu for meals.</b>
<b> II. Skill . - Reading skill .</b>


<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : vcd , radio pictures p 120 .</b>
<b>D .</b>



<b> Ways of working : T – wc , pw , gw , indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : - Ss may have difficulty in writing B3. T can </b>
explain and give them the cue words .


<b>F . Proceduce.</b>
<b>I.Greeting .</b>
<b>II- Revision . </b>


-"Braistorming"(3ms)


What do you eat for breakfast, lunch, dinner ?
fish


breakfast lunch dinner


bread meat


III.New lesson


Teacher's activities Students'activities
1. Pre-reading.(15ms)


a.Pre teach.


- energy( n ) năng lợng


- a balanced diet : chế độ ăn kiêng cân đối
- moderate amount(n )Khối lợng vừa phải


- body-building food (n)Thức ăn phát triển
cơ bắp


- dairy product (n) Thực phẩm bơ sữa
- fatty food (n) thứ ăn nhiÒu chÊt bÐo
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> "Slap the board"
c.T/F statement prediction.


<b>a)</b> Sugar isn't an healthy food.
<b>b)</b> We eat moderate amount of


fatty food and suger.


<b>c)</b> Meat and dairy products are not
body building foods.



<b>d)</b> Eat plenty of cereals fruit and
vegetables.


<b>e)</b> Eat too much food you enjoy.


Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus &
in individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss read and predict the sentences.


- Reading the dialogue in
individual & check their prediction.
- Correcting the keys.


-Ss read the text and corect.
*Answer key:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>

d.Presentation text: B2 – P120


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the


dialogue.


- Asks Ss to read the dialogue in individual
& check their prediction & correct the
prediction.


- Corrects & comments.
2. While-reading.(18ms)
Activity 1:


-T asks Ss to read the text and check the
prediction.


Activity 2:


-T asks Ss to read the text again and


answer the questions: a, b, c P.120 B2-text
book.


- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to
work in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.


- Asks Ss to give the answer by asking &
answering in pairs.


- Corrects & comments.


<b> Questions:Name two advantages of eating</b>


sugar ?


1. Is a balanced diet alone enough for
a healthy lifestyle ?


2. Do you think your diet is balanced ?
Why ? Why not ?


3. Post-reading.(7ms)


<b>-</b> B3 -P.120 -text book.


(After Ss write the new menu,ask them to
compare it with the menu they write at the
beginning of the lesson and decide what
they should eat for eat meal.)


- T controls and corrects.


b) T
c) F
d) T
e) F


- Working in pairs to ask &
answering the questions.


- Giving the answer by asking &
answering in pairs.



- Correcting the answers.
* Answer keys:


1.It adds taste to food & gives
energy.


2.No, it isn’t. Because all people
need exercise to keep the life
healthy.


3.No, she didn’t.


I think my diet is balanced / not
balanced because.


- Working in groups to discuss.
- Reporting the ideals.


<b>IV.Consolidation:(1m)</b>Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.


<b>V.Homework :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 12: Language focus 4.


Preparing's day: 21/02/2011



<b>LANGUAGE FOCUS 4</b>


<b>Period: 78</b>



<b>A .</b>


<b> Aims : Help ss remind all knowledge from unit 9 to unit 12. </b>


<b>B . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to remind all </b>
knowledge from unit 9 to unit 12.


<b> I . Knowledge . The simple past tense</b>
Indefinite quantifiers


Too and either/ So and neither
<b> II. Skill . - Reading skill .</b>


<b>C .</b>


<b> Materials : pictures p 123 , 128 .</b>
<b>D .</b>


<b> Ways of working : T – wc , pw , gw , indi…</b>
<b>E .</b>


<b> Anticipated problems : - this period is too long . So teacher get ss to prepare</b>
well at home .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>

<b>I.Greeting .</b>
<b>II- Revision . </b>
<b> III.New lesson</b>



Teacher's activities Students'activities
1. The simple past tense.(20ms)


-T asks ss to give the example ,
structure, use.


Ex:


I ate pork last night


She went to school last week.


<b>-</b> T asks ss to do exercise 1 .
*Answer key:


.No,I didn't. I went to thr movie
theater.


.No,I didn't .I read book.
-T corrects.


2. Indefinite quantifiers(10ms)


<b>-</b> T asks Ss how to use.


<b>-</b> a little


<b>-</b> a lot of/ lots of



<b>-</b> too much


T gives exercise 2 and ask ss to do.
(P.124)


3. too and either.(5ms)


-T asks Ss to give the way to use them.
Ex:


S1: i like pork


S2: I don't like cat, either.
...etc.


4. so and neither.(5ms)


-T asks Ss to give the way to use them.
Ex:


S1: I like cat,so does she.


S2: I don't like cat, neither does she.
...etc.


-T gives exercise 5 P.127-128
-T controls and corrects.


- Practicing in pairs & in pairs by
asking & answering the questions with


“NO”.


- Giving the answers.


-Correcting the pronunciation.


<i><b>- </b></i>Working in individual to use “A
LITTLE – A LOT OF / LOTS OF –
TOO MUCH” to fill in the dialogue.
- Comparing & giving the keys.


- Working in pairs to practice the
dialogue.


- Correcting the pronunciation.


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>IV.Consolidation :(3ms)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content.
<b>V.Homework :(2ms)</b>



<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 13:A1-2
<b>G .Can improve</b>


...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>

<b>WEEK: 27</b>


Preparing's day: 25/2/2010


Teaching's day: 7A: 7B: 7C:

<b>Unit 13 : ACTIVITIES</b>



<b>Lesson 1: SPORTS <A1-2></b>


<b>Period: 79</b>



<b>A . Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details
and the main ideas about the most popular sports in the USA.


<b>I.Knowledge.</b>


- The most popular sports in the USA.
<b>II. Skill</b>



- Reading skill.
<b>B. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>-II- Revision</b>


-"Brainstorming"(3ms)


football
Sports


III.New lesson


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Pre-reading.(15ms)</b>


a.Pre teach.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=187>

bánh xe dọc ở đế
giày)


- basketball: mơn bóng rổ


- rollerblading: trượt ba tanh (giày có
bánh xe ở 4 góc
- athletics : (n) điền kinh



- T introduces the words by
explaining the meaning,
using the situation & gives
example.


- T models (3 times) and
helps Ss to repeat (2 times).
- T checks S’s reading in
individual and corrects the
mistakes.


- T writes the words on the
Bb and checks the meaning,
the pronunciation.


- T corrects & asks Ss to copy
the words.


b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> "Matching"
<b>-</b> (Using pictures)


c.Open prediction.


-T asks Ss to predict what
sports is the first choice and
what sports is the tenth
choice of teenagers in the
USA.



-T ticks the poster on the
board.


<b>2. While-reading.(18ms)</b>
Activity 1:


T asks ss to read A1 P.129
-text book and check their
prediction.


- Ss repeat the words in chorus
& in individual and correct the
mistakes


- Ss give the meaning & the
pronunciation


- Ss copy the words.


-Ss predict.


SPORTS POSITION


A.football
B.volleyball
C.skateboarding
D.tennis


E.baseball


F.swimming
G.badminton
H.roller-skating
K.basketball
I.rolleblading


- Ss read A1 (P129- textbook)
and check their prediction.


*Answer key:
baseball: first
swiming: tenth
Example exchange:


S1: What sport is the third
choice?


S2: Roller-skating is the third
choice.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=188>

Activity 2:


T asks ss to read A1 again
and work in pairs to ask the
questions:


?What sport is the
third choice - the
nineth choice?
<b>3. Post-reading.(5ms)</b>


-T asks Ss work individually -
in pairs - in groups to list the
most popular sports in Viet
nam.


-T controls and corrects.


- Ss work individually -> in
pairs-> in groups to list the
most popular sports in Viet Nam


<b>IV.Consolidation :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this


content.


<b>V.Homework :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 13: A3-5


<b>VI.Can improved</b>


...
...
...



... THE END
Preparing's day: 27/2/2010


Teaching's day: 7A: 7B: 7C:

<b>Unit 13 : ACTIVITIES</b>


<b>Lesson 2: SPORTS <A3-5></b>



<b>Period: 80</b>


<b>A . Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about sporting
activities..


<b>I.Knowledge.</b>
- Sporting activities.
<b>II. Skill</b>


- Reading and speaking skill.
<b>B. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>-II- Revision</b>


-"Guessing game" (3ms)
I play tennis.


Ex:



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=189>

S2: No, I don't.


S1: Do you play tennis?
S2: Yes, I do.


...etc.


III.New lesson


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Presentation.(15ms)</b>


a.Pre teach.


- skillful (adj): điêu luyện, có kỉ thuật
- slow (adj): chậm


- quick (adj): nhanh
- safe (adj): an toàn
- careful (adj): cẩn thận
- careless (adj): cẩu thả


- (to) cycle : quay vòng, đạp xe đạp
- T introduces the words by
explaining the meaning, using
the situation & gives example.
- T models (3 times) and helps
Ss to repeat (2 times).



- T checks S’s reading in
individual and corrects the
mistakes.


- T writes the words on the Bb
and checks the meaning, the
pronunciation.


- T corrects & asks Ss to copy
the words.


- T helps Ss to practice the
vocabulary


b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> "What and Where"


c.Presentation text.


<b>-</b> A3 P.131 (text book )


- T asks Ss to look at the
picture of Kim Hue and
answer the questions:


? Who is Kim Hue?
? How does she play?
-



-T asks Ss to give their keys on
the Bb.


- Ss repeat the words in chorus
& in individual and correct the
mistakes


- Ss give the meaning & the
pronunciation


- Ss copy the words.


- Ss look at the picture of Kim
Hue and answer the questions:
<b>* Model sentences:</b>


<i><b>- She is a good volleyball</b></i>
<i><b>player.</b></i>


<i><b>- Ss: She play well </b></i>
* Formation:


S+ be + (a/an) + adj + N
S + Verb(e/es) + adv
* Concept checking:


Adjectives come before a
noun.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=190>

<i>? What comes before the noun</i>


<i>“Volleyball player”?</i>


<i>? Is it an adjective?</i>


<i>? What come after subject?</i>
<i>? Is it ordinary verb?</i>


<i>? What come after the ordinal </i>
<i>verb?</i>


<b>2. Practice.(18ms)</b>


<b>-</b> Picture drill.


<b>1)</b>good/well
<b>2)</b>slow/slowly
<b>3)</b>quick/quickly
<b>4)</b>bad/badly
<b>3. Production.(7ms)</b>
Activity 1:


<b>-</b> A5 p.132-133 -text book.


Activity 2:


T asks Ss to read the text A5
P.132-133 and list some of the
advice every kid should clearly
remember when he/she swims
in the swimming pool.



-T controls and corrects.


ordinary verb


- Ss repeat in choral.


- Ss present the question and
answer.


- Ss work in pairs -> open
pairs


Example exchange:
She is a slow simmer.
She swims slowly.
....etc.


-Ss read the text A5 P.132-133
and list some of the advice
every kid should clearly


remember when he/she swims
in the swimming pool.


<b>IV.Consolidation :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this


content.



<b>V.Homework :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 13: A4


<b>VI.Can improved</b>


...
...
...
...


<i>THE END</i>
Preparing's day: 1/3/2010


Teaching's day: 7A: 7B: 7C:

<b>Unit 13 : ACTIVITIES</b>



<b>Lesson 3: SPORTS <A4></b>


<b>Period: 81</b>



<b>A . Objectives .</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=191>

<b>I.Knowledge.</b>


- Walking-one of the sports activities


<b>II. Skill</b>


- Reading skill
<b>B. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>-II- Revision</b>


-A1 P.82 (work book) (3ms)


- Students write adverbs corresponding to the adjectives
- bad ->


- slow ->
- quick ->
- safe ->
- skillful ->


- sudden ->
- dangerous ->
III.New lesson


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Pre -reading.(15ms)</b>


a.Pre teach.


- (to) take part in : tham gia



- (to) organize: tổ chức


- (to) volunteer: xung phong


- volunteer (n) người xung phong


- participant (n): người tham gia


- prize (n) : giải thưởng


- competition (n): cuộc tranh tài
- T introduces the words by
explaining the meaning, using
the situation and gives
example.


- T models (3 times) and helps
Ss to repeat (2 times).


- T checks S’s reading in
individual and corrects the
mistakes.


- T writes the words on the Bb
and checks the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- T corrects & asks Ss to copy
the words



b.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> R.O.R


c.Open prediction.


-T asks Ss to predict two


- Ss repeat the words in chorus
and in individual and correct
the mistakes


- Ss give the meaning & the
pronunciation


- Ss copy the words.


- Ss predict the answer of the
question.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=192>

activities of the club chieldren
take part in.


? Close your book.


- T writes the questions the
Bb and asks Ss to predict.
- T asks Ss to work in groups of
5 or 6



<b>2. While -reading .(20ms)</b>
Activity 1:


-T asks Ss to read the text and
check their prediction.


*Answer key:


<b>1)</b>WFF: walking for
fun.


<b>2)</b>WTS day: walk to
school day.


Activity 2:


-T asks Ss to read the text
again and answer the


questions a-f ( question c has
been answerd in the pre


stage).


-T gives a game "Hang man"
to asks Ss to practice.


<b>3.Post- reading.(5ms)</b>
-T asks Ss to practice in groups


to dicuss the question" What
sports activities do you like
best ? Why?".


- T controls and corrects.


- Ss read the text (A4-P132) and


check their prediction.
<i><b>* Answers keys:</b></i>
<i><b>a. Walking.</b></i>


<i><b>b. WFF is walking for fun</b></i>
<i><b> WTS is walk-to school</b></i>
<i><b>day</b></i>


- Ss read the text again and
answer the questions.


- Ss work in groups of 4 (one
table)


<i><b> key:</b></i>


a. The writer takes part in
Walking For Fun club/ walking
b. Because last years, they
won the 1st<sub> prize in a district</sub>


walking competition; they


were so happy and wished /
wanted to keep this activity.
c. One activity is a 5 km walk/


walking 5km to the beach on
Sunday morning; and the
other is walk- to- school day.
d. It’s 5 km from school to the


beach


e. Wednesday is the WTS day.
f. Members living near school
often take part in the WTS day.
- Ss work in groups of 5 or 6 to
discuss the question.




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=193>

<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this


content.


<b>V.Homework :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 13: B1-2



<b>VI.Can improved</b>


...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=194>

<b>WEEK: 28</b>


Preparing's day: 14/3/2009


Teaching's day: 7A: 7B: 7C: 7D: 7E:
<b> </b>


<b>Unit 13 : ACTIVITIES</b>



<b>Lesson 4: COME AND PLAY <B1-2></b>


<b>Period: 82</b>



<b>A . Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to give advice and futher
practice with making an invitation.


<b>I.Knowledge.</b>


- Using model verbs "can, must, should, ought to"


- Giving advice and futher practice with making an invitation.
<b>II. Skill</b>



- Reading and speaking skill.
<b>B. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting </b>


<b>-II- Revision</b>


-"Slap the board"(3ms)


(using pictures P.134-135 -text book)
play tennis play badminton
play volleyball play chess


- Write the words on the board.


- Call 2 teams of students (6 students each team) to in front
if class.


- Make sure they stand at an equal distance from the board.
- Teacher calls out one word in Vietnamese, the two Ss must


run forward and slap the word on the Bb.


- The one who slaps the correct word first is winner.


- Continue to ask two more Ss to come forward... until all
the words are slapped



IIlI.New lesson


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>I.Presentation(15ms)</b>


<b>1. Vocabulary:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=195>

- paddle (n): cây vợt bong bàn


- T introduces the words by
explaining the meaning, using the
situation & gives example.


- T models and helps Ss to repeat.
- T checks S’s reading in individual
& corrects the mistakes.


- T writes the words on the Bb &
checks the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- T corrects & asks Ss to copy the
words.


- T helps Ss to practice the
vocabulary


<b>2.Presentation text.</b>
- B1 P.134 .



<b>-</b> Comprehension questions a d


(P.134- text book)


<b>-</b> T gives a game "Shark attack"


to practice.


<b>Model sentences:</b>


You ought to finish it before I play
table tennis.


You must do your homework first.
Structure:


S + ought to/must/should/can +
V(inf) + O.


<b>II.Practice.(18ms)</b>


<b>-</b> "Word cue drill"


1) Lan/toothache -


She/ought to/see doctor.
2) Nam/somehomework -


He/must/do/homework.
3) Minh/late/school -



He/should/get up/early.
4) Ba/eat/too much/meat -


He/ought


to/eat/more/vegetables.
<b>III.Production.(7ms)</b>


<b>-</b> B2 P.135 (text book)


<b>-</b> T asks Ss to work individually


to change the underlined and
then practice with a partner.


- Ss repeat the words in
chorus and in individual
and correct the mistakes
- Ss give the meaning and
the pronunciation


- Ss copy the words.


- Ss listen and read the
dialogue at the same time.
- Ss work in pairs,
practice the dialogue


<b> -Form</b>



<b> Modal verbs </b>
<i><b>+ infinitive </b></i>


- Ss repeat in choral.


- Ss present the question
and answer.


- Ss work in pairs -> open
pairs


Example exchange:
Lan has toothache. She
ought to see a doctor.
...etc.


- Ss open the books
(P135).


- Ss change the underlined
details


- Ss work in pairs -> open
pairs.


<i><b>* Basketball</b></i>


<b>Ba: Come and play </b>
<b>basketball, Nam?</b>


Nam: I’m sorry. I don’t
think I can.


Ba: That’s too bad. Why
not?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=196>

T controls and corrects .


my room.


Ba: Can you play on
Friday?


Nam: yes, I can.


Ba: All right. See you at
seven


Nam: OK. Bye.
Ba: Bye.
<b>IV.Consolidation :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this


content.


<b>V.Homework :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.



<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 13: B3-4


<i>THE END</i>
Preparing's day: 15/3/2009


Teaching's day: 7A: 7B: 7C: 7D: 7E:

<b>Unit 13 : ACTIVITIES</b>



<b>Lesson 5: COME AND PLAY <B3-4></b>


<b>Period: 83</b>



<b>A . Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details
about another kind of sports--scuba -diving and futher practice with model verb
"can/could".


<b>I.Knowledge.</b>


- Another kind of sports--scuba -diving
-Practicing with model verb "can/could".
<b>II. Skill</b>


- Reading skill.
<b>B. Proceduce.</b>


<b>I.Greeting </b>



<b>-II- Revision</b>


-"Matching"(3ms)
1.besaball


2.skateboarding
3.roller-skating
4.basketball
5.volleyball
6.badminton
III.New lesson


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Pre-reading.(15ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=197>

- (to ) stay underwater: đứng dới nớic


- (to) invent: phat minh, s¸ng chÕ


- invention (n) sù ph¸t minh


- (to) explore: th¸m hiĨm


- scuba- diving : lỈn cã sư dơng b×nh
dìng khÝ


- diver (n): thợ lặn


- ocean(n): đại dơng



- T introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation & gives
example.


- T models (3 times) and helps Ss to
repeat (2 times).


- T checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- T writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.


- T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
- T helps Ss to practice the


vocabularyb.Check vocab.


<b>-</b> "What and Where"


c.T/F prediction.


- B3 P.137 (text book)
<b>2.</b>While -reading.(18ms)
Activity 1:


-T asks Ss to read the text and check
their prediction.



Activity 2:


-" Answer given"
a. 2 minutes
b.a long time
c.1997


d.the early 1940s


e.spencial T.V cameras.
<b>3.</b>Post-reading.(7ms)


<b>-</b> T asks Ss to write about invention.


Invention Verbs Sentences
special


breathing
equipment


-explore
the


ocean


before
spencial
breathing
equipment we
couldn't



explore the
ocean, we


- Ss repeat the words
in chorus & in
individual and correct
the mistakes


- Ss give the meaning
& the pronunciation
- Ss copy the words.


<b>-</b> Ss work in groups


of 4 or 5 to predict
<b> - Ss read the text </b>
again and check their
prediction.


- Students make the
suitable question.
* Key:


a) Who could stay
underwater for longer
two minutes?


b) How long can a



diver stay


underwater?


c) When did Jacques
Cousteau die?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=198>

couldn't learn
about the sea.
electricity -read at


night
-watch
T.V
-use
compute
r


-listen to
music


Before


electricity, we
couldn't read
at night.


the


motorbike -travel far


-get
home
quickly
-visit
places


Before the
motorbike,we
couldn't travel
far.


<b>IV.Consolidation :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this


content.


<b>V.Homework :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 14: A1-2


<i>THE END</i>
Preparing's day: 15/3/2009


Teaching's day: 7A: 7B: 7C: 7D: 7E:

<b>Unit 14 : FREETIME FUN</b>




<b>Lesson 1: TIME FOR T.V <A1-2></b>


<b>Period: 84</b>



<b>A . Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about freetime
activities and expressing preferences, use "like/ prefer + to -infinitive".


<b>I.Knowledge.</b>


<b>-</b> Freetime activities and expressing preferences


<b>-</b> Using "like/ prefer + to -infinitive
<b>II. Skill</b>


-Reading and speaking skill.
.B. Proceduce.


<b>I.Greeting </b>
<b>II- Revision</b>


-"Matching"(3ms)


read friends


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=199>

have homework


go T.V



listen chess (play chess)


watch dinner


meet books


III.New lesson


Teacher's activities Students'activities
<b>1. Presentation.(15ms)</b>


a.Vocabulary


- adventure (n): cuộc phiêu lưu
- cricket (n): con dế


- series (n): phim nhiều tập
- (to) guess: đoán


- T introduces the words by
explaining the meaning, using
the situation and gives
example.


- T models and helps Ss to
repeat.


- T checks S’s reading in
individual and corrects the
mistakes.



- T writes the words on the Bb
and checks the meaning, the
pronunciation.


- T corrects and asks Ss to copy
the words.


- T helps Ss to practice the
vocabulary.


b.Presentation dialogue.
- A1 P.139


T asks Ss to read the dialogue
carefully to get the main of this
content.


c.Model sentences:


-T sets a sence to give the
model sentences.


My aunt and uncle don't like it.
They prefer to do other thing.


<b>2. Practice.(18ms)</b>
a."word cue drill"


5) He/music - He/play


sports.


6) She/movies -


- Ss repeat the words in
chorus and in individual and
correct the mistakes


- Ss give the meaning and the
pronunciation


- Ss copy the words.


-Ss to read the dialogue
carefully to get the main of
this content.


-Ss give the form of the
sentences:


* Like + v_ing/ to- infinitive
* “Prefer + V- ing/ to inf.” have
the same usage of “Like+ to –
<i>infinitive”</i>


<i>Prefer + V- ing + to+ V-ing: </i>
like to do this things more
than other thing.


- Ss repeat in choral.



- Ss present the question and
answer.


- Ss work in pairs -> open
pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=200>

She/listen to music.
7) They/game -


They/read book
8) Lan/T.V - Lan/meet


friends.


b.Comprehension questions.
- A1 P.140 (a- e)


T gives a game "hang man" to
ask Ss tp practice well.


3.Production.(7ms)
-A1 P.141 (text book)
T asks ss to work in pairs.
change the underlined details
using the infor,ation in the box
P.141 ( text book).


-T corrects.



He doesn't like music.
He prefers to play sports.
....etc.


-Ss enjoy the game.


-Ss work in pairs. change the
underlined details using the
infor,ation in the box P.141


<b>IV.Consolidation :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this


content.


<b>V.Homework :(1m)</b>


<b>-</b> Learning by heart all content.


<i><b>-</b></i> Doing exercises in workbook.


<i><b>-</b></i> Preparing new lesson: Unit 14: A3


<i>THE END</i>


WEEK: 29


Preparing's day: 20/3/2009



Teaching's day: 7A: 7B: 7C: 7D: 7E:

<b>Unit 14 : FREETIME FUN</b>



<b>Lesson 2: TIME FOR T.V <A3></b>


<b>Period: 85</b>



<b>A . Objectives .</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details
about T.V.


<b>I.Knowledge.</b>
- Time for T.V
<b>II. Skill</b>


</div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×